In prepar ing th i s t raat i ee the f ollowing Upani ga d u have be en con su lte d .
The abb reviat i on s u s ed throu ghou t are al so h ere indi c at e d .
Xgrama
Adhyfitmé
Advayatfiraka
Ai tare ya
Ah gamfili ka
Ak qi
Amgt ab indu
Annapfirq a
Ir qey a
Kruneya
Atharvagikhfi
Itwfi
Itma ( pra) bodha
Avadhfita
Avy aht a
Bahvgca
Ba qkala
Eha sma jabila
Xgrama
Adhyfi .
Advay .
Ai t .
Ak qam .
Ak qi
Amxdt .
Anna .
Kr;
Ath . Q1khfi
t ab .
Avadh .
Avyak ta
Bahvrgca
Ba g .
Bhasma .
Bhav .
Bhik q .
Brahma
Brahmab .
Brahmav .
t .
95ndx lt a
Qarabha
Qarfri ka
Qfigyfiy ani'
y a
7:u nak a
C hagaleya
Ghandog ya
Qi ras ( Atharvaqi ra s )
gi va safikalpa
QrIi éladargana
Cfilika
Qv e téc vatara
Dak gi q amfirt i
Dat t at reya
Dhyfinabindu
Devi
Ekak gara
Ganapati
Garbha
Géru da
Cau dapfida' s Kfiriha s
Ga yat rf
Go pfilapfirvatfipanfy a
Gopalo t ta ratépanIy a
GopIoandana
Hafiea
Hanuma duh tarfimfi
Hayag riva
Iqfi
Jabéla
Jfibali
Kaivalya
Kalagni ru dra
Kali santfiri qa
Kaqthaqru t i
lt a
Kagharu d ra
Kau qft ak i
Nfidab indu Nada .
Harada pa rivraj aha Narad .
Narayana Haréy .
NIla ru dra NIla .
Ni ralamba Ki ra.
Ni rvfiq g; Ni rv .
Ncs ihhapfirvatfipaniya “t sp .
Ngs ifihot ta ratfipaniy a Hq su .
“
gu pat ab rahma q u .
Pfiifig ala
Pafioabrahma Par'
Lc a .
Parabrahpa Parab .
Parama hansa Paramah .
Paramahafisaparivréj ah a Pa ramap .
Pinda Find
Fragna Frag .
Praqagnihot ra Praq ég .
Praqava G . B . l . 1716— 30 .
Pu ru ga sfik ta P . S .
Raha sya ( Qukrara ha sya ) Hah as .
Ramépfirvatapani ya
Ramaraha sy a
Ramgot taratapaniy a
Ru drahrgdaya
Ru drak ga jabfila
Safinyfiea
Sara evat i raha eya
Sa rvopani qat sara
Sau bhfigy alak qmi
savi t ri
SItE Si tE Tu rfyat i téva dhfita
Skanda Shanda . Va j ra sfic i ka
Su bala Sub . Varadapfirva t ip anf
Sury a Sfirya . Varadot taratfipani
Tadova Tadv Varaba
Tai t t ari y n T ai t . vasudeva
Tara sara Sara Ya jnavalkhya
Te j ob i ndu T o j o YOg aci kha
T riv
Tricikhabrahmana— r/
Tog } . Yogac u damani
Tri padvi bhfit ima hanarayana T ri p . h . Yogakundali
T ripura T ri p . Yogata t tva
Tri pu ratapaniya Tri ptap .
I n selec t ing the se Upani sad ekhe gui ding p rinsi ple has b een to inc lude
all those which app ear in standard c o llec t ion s o f Upanisad s . Tho se named
above are inc luded in th e f ol£%ing c ollec t ion s . 1. Twent§i ght Upani sad s ,
publi she d by the Mi rnaya Sagar Pre s s,Bombay . 2 . Atharvana Upani sad s , wi th
the Commentary of Narayana , publi shed in the Bi bli othec a Indiaa . 3 . Elev en
Atharvana Upani sad s , edit ed by Cb l . Jac ob . 4 . One Hundored and ei ght Upani
sad s , gu bli she d at the " Tat tvavivec aka Pre s s",Bombay . 5 . Deu s sen '
s si xt y
Upani sad s . No at t emp t ha s b e en made t o e dit the t ext s in any way , but
where there are divergenc e s in the t ext s,th e one fo llowed by Deu s s en.
has b een cho sen , whenever h e has t ran slat ed th e Upani sad .T he one exc ep t ion
i s the Hahanarayana , which Deu s sen t ran slat ed in part only . The t ext in
the Twenty eight Upan i sad s was u sed in thi s c ase . The t ex t of the One Hund red
and Figh t Upan i sad s wa s f o llowed only i n case s wh ere the Upanlqa d was no t
inc lu ded in some o ther collec tion . Gau dapada's Karika s were al so i ncluded .
For some of the Upani sa i s in De u s s en 's sixty , no San skri t o ri gi nal ha s y e t
be en f ound,so hi s t ran slat ion has b een f ollowe d . In such c ase s i t has
been nec e s sary to gue s s at t he San sk ri t wo rd employed,but as no thing
imj c rtant hangs on the se re f erence s, any erro r along thi s line wi ll not
af fec t the value o f the wo rk . The t ext o f th e Pranava Upani sad i s not
i nc luded in xkn any o f the c ollec t i on s ment i oned above,but i s to be found
in the Gopa tha Brahmana ,as i nd ic at ed by Blo omf i eld
,the Atharva Veda
,
sec t i on 68 . Th e sho rt Gayat ri Upani sad , al so inc lu de i in th e Go,e the Brahma
h e , was examined , and a few re f erenc e s obtaine d .
The aim has b een to inslu de eve ry re f e renc e t o a part of the bo dy
c ontai ned in the Upani sad s . I t i s p o s sible that i n th e case o f the lat e
and unimpo rtant Upani sad s , of which no t ran slati on exi st s,some refe renls
have b een ove rloox e d . I n some case s , where a stat ement in regard to the
bo dy or some of i t s part s,i s re p eated in the same st anza or in c lo s e
rrox imi t y , e sp ec ially i f the ment ion b e an unimpo rtan t one , only one re f
e renc e i s quo t ed . Some of the weary ing and unimpo rtant ment i on s in the Yoga
Upani sad s are thu s slight e d . But in th e ca se fh o lde r and more impo rt ant
Upani qad s , Whi ch have b een veri f i ed by Jac ob ' s Conc o rdanc e , it i s beli ev ed
that not hi ng i s omi t te d,ex c ep ti ng a few duplic at e men t ion s in I single
ve r ses . In thi s c onnec t i on it may b e ment ione d that oc ca sionally Jac ob has
ove rlook ed pas sage s .
The primary pu rp o se o f t hi s wri ting i s to p re sent a study o f th e
bod y and i t s par t s as f ound in the Upani sad s . Thi s has naturally le d into
a mo re or le s s c cmplet e t reatment o f the phy sio logy o f the body as well ,
and to some d i sc u s si on o f the mental f unc ti ons , in so far as th ey ar e
relat ed t o the aiiifi3i Only very rarely has mat t e r no t f ound in the Upafi
i sad s been int ro duc ed i nt o thi s t reati se .
Re f e renc e s to the body and i t s part s f all int o se veral clas se s o r
t y pe s,ac c o rd i ng t o the li ne of thought ogfths wri t er , o r the irnm di ate
ob Je c t he has in vi ew . The f i r st t y p e of re f erenc e may b e de sc ribed as
the sc ient i f ic , or Q uat i — sc iht i fi c . In thi s c la s s th e writ er dec ri b e s the
Typ e s of'
part s re f e rre d to as they ac tually are, or at least as he unde r stand s them
to be , o r mak e s some plai n mat t er of f ac t re f e renc e t o the part . To be
su re,many such re f e r enc e s do not p re sent the ac tual fac t s
,but th ey at
leas t give u s the wri te r ' s c oncep t i on o f the bod y .
T he seed? ty p e may be de s ribe d as Figurat ive o r Fanc i ful . Here
some f igurat ive u se . i s made of the part re f e rred t o .
A thi rd ty pe i s the Ri tuali stic o r Sac ramental t y pe . The body i s
look e d upon as a mean s of wo r shi p amd i s u sed a s a mean s of a c qui ring
merit or re lease . Thi s i s the ca se when ash e s or some oth er mat e rial i s
ap p lied to the body in c e rtai n part s as a reli giou s dut y,o r when y oga
po sture s and b reathing s are en j o i ned .
A f ourth t yp e of menti on i s that when th e memob s r\s of dei ti e s and
oc casi onally o f an imal s are re f erred t o .
A f i f th t ype ,int ermingled with all the above
,i s f ound in tho se
in stanc e s whe re the writ er, no matt er what hi s point o f vi ew may be , t ak e s
a pe s simi ste vi ew o f the bo dy .
A sixth t y p e inc lude s co s mic al dorrelat ions . I n th i s th e univ er se
i s p ic tu red as a vast man,
or as evolv ed f rom some such p rimeval being .
In st ead o f a man ,the f igure of a bi rd may b e employe d , whi le the Brhad
Aranyaka Upani sad t op en s wit h the c o smical c o rrelati on s of the agvame d ha .
In all ca s e s of the least importanc e , the s e di f f erent ty pe s o f
re f e renc e will be f ound separate d in the f ollowing page s . Si mi larly , in
c ase s where the c i rcum stanc e s req u i re i t,th e c hronologic al d evelop ement
of a sub j ec t o r i dea i s indic ate d,b y t rac i ng it through the ol der , mi d dle ,
and late r Upanisad s .
Nec e s sarily,When th e purp o se i s to inc lu de all the ment ion s f ound
in the Upanisad s , much has had to b e in cluded wh1 ch i s of very mi no r ln
po rtanc e .An e f fo rt has b een ma de to ke e p the se pas sage s as much as fe a sibl e
i n th e bac kground .
8
General gurvoy .
An examinat i on o f t he li st o f part s o f the b ody ment i oned in the
Upani sad s , enume rated e l sewhere in thi s t reat i se , i mp re s se s one with the
f ac t that must o f the part s are ext ernal . Bloo d , b one,sinew
,and the like
are ment ioned , it i s t rue , but in a ve ry broad and general way . Spec ifi
sinew s o r t endons are not ment ioned by th e wri t er s o f the Upani sad s at all ,
and very f ew bone s . The skull i s more ment ioned t han another o s seou s part of
the b ody ; the bac k bone i s re f e rred t o a fsw t t ime s i n some o f the lat e Upani
sad s . There i s al so menti on of the rib s . Onc e the exac t numb er o f b one s i s
g iv en as 360 , in Garbha . I n regard to the o the r part s o f the b ody , the mat t er
i s even more st ri k ing , as wi ll b e shown lat er on . Re f erenc e s t o the ext ernal s
of the lody , on the oth er hand,are f ai rly numerou s .
Th e reason s of thi s are‘
vari c ua With the exc ept i on of the lat e Garbha ,
whic h in part s has the ap pearanc e o f a medic al t reati se , the Upani sad s are
not much c onc e rned with th e b ody f rom a purely phy sic al standpo int . Perhap s
some sec t i ons o f the lat e Yoga Upani sad s may b e c on si de red as purely mat e ri al .
Their wri t e rs are not medical men . It i s t here f o re no t t o be exp ec t e d t hat
they would at all time s b e sc i ent i f i c ally ac curat e . They were o rdinarily
my st i c s , and men who looked on the bod y a s a thi ng t o b e de spi sed , as some
thing ut terly worthle ss i n c ompari son to the soul , with which they c hi ef ly
c onc e rned themselve s . At the same t ime , they were not all mys t ic s , and we
might expec t such writ e rs to voic e the general anat omic al knowledge o f thei r
t ime s . Fo r they mu st a s a c la ss have b een the mo st int elligent men o f thei r
t ime s,and even i f they were no t spec ial ly i nt ere st ed in medic al knowledge ,
th ey should have po s se s sed,
o r c ould easi ly hav e ob tained , what knowledge o f
the bod y the b e st mi nd s o f the c ount ry b oast ed So i t would not be far out fif
t he way t o say a s p re sent ed in the Upani sad s , whi le no t as t rue
as that which may f ound in medic al t reat i se s o f th e same t ime , y et g ive s a
v ery lai r pic ture o f what the bet t er c las se s o f p eo p le beli eved in regard to
i t in the t ime s the Upani sad s we re wri t t en .
General Survey .
Th e fac t that they were chie f ly int e re st ed in the soul and no t in the
b o dy , though i t p rev ent ed the writ er s f rom going sy st ematic ally int o the
de sc ript io n o f the bo dy , nev erth ele ss c omp elled them to wri t e mo re or le s s
about i t . For the soul i s i nt inmt ely c onnec t ed wi th the bo dy,bound up in
i t , and th e great p robl em o f li f e i s t o obtain pe rpe tual release fronx what i s
mat e rial . Even i n th e earli e st Upanisad s , set ti ng fo rth what may be known as
the jnaaan xrg that i s,mak ing knowledge th e c au se and mean s of release ,
c ra m“J l t
“ ' i t i s nec e s sary t o di s cu s s the bo dy b ec au se o f i t s relat ion t o th e
soul . For the soul i s d i s cu ssed qu i t e f ully . I t s relat i on to , and at t ime s i t s
i d ent i f ic at i on with the p ru ne ,it s c onnec t ion wi th the sen se s , and thei r de
pendenc e on the bo dy ; the s e thing s mak e necie s sary a di sc u s sion of part s o f
the b o dy . The body i n chant s and sac ri f ic e s call s f o r my st ic al and sp i rit ual
i z ing di s cu s sion s ; the i dent i f ic at ion o f the human soul wit h the All-Soul , and
the panthe i st ic c onc ept ion o f the univer se l ed t o int ere sti ng f i gure s and
de s c ri pt ions e In lat er t ime s,when th e sarr a
r
a rg had Upani sad s devot ed t o i t ,
we have the nu mox ou s Yoga de sc ri p t i on s o f the part s o f t he bo dy which are t o
b e u sed in Yoga p rac t ic e s in o rd er t o obtain release , and the same i s t rue
in th e h h ck b: Upani sad s , where the tilaha , o r the coat ing o f ashe s , o r the
ro sary of r i ir?I c : f ruit s i s wo rn t o p rop it iat e some part ic ukar dei ty . The se
furni sh the chie f oc casion s f or the ment i on o f the bo dy and i t s part s , though
in inc i d ent al way s,and in c ompari sons
,many part s are ment ioned . Henc e it will
b e seen t hat we ought not to lo ok f or any ab so lut ely complet e and s c ienti f ic
d e s cript ion o f the bo dy and i t s part s , but only re f erenc e s t o it s general
f ea t ure s and main organ s . How well thi s i s c arri ed out the floowing pag e s wi ll
shOW .
Some int ere st ing things c ome out in a stud y o f the body as ment ioned
in the Upanisad s . One i s t hat thepa
rly Upani sad s are more c o rrec t in th ei r
st at eme nt s than the lat er one s . Seve ral reason s no d oubt c ont ribut ed t o th i s ,
one o f which b eing the u se o f the sac ri f ic e . The o lde st Upani sad s we re wri t ten
11
General Survey
that more at t enti on i s paid t o the ext e rio r part s than t o the int erior .
Ev erythi ng c onsp i cuous about the b ody i s na med , area to the several f inger s ,
each of which has i t s own name . But th e c ond i ti on i s di f f erent with the
vi tal o rgan s . Muc h spac e i s given t o the c on si derat i on o f the heart , But the
lungs , as such , and the l iver, are each ment ioned but onc e
,and thi s i s in
c onnec t ion W i th the a ;"
au odla . Thi s lead s th e w ri t er to think that the lungs
at least ,we re inc luded with the heart under the t erm h
qd . hric ya , and many
o f the things sai d about the heart,e spec ially it s c ompari son t o a lotu s
,
seem to c onf irm thi s vi ew . The st omach,the sple en
,the bowel s
,all rec eive
e ither very sc ant ment ion or none at all . The f unc t i on of the mu sc le s doe s
no t se em t o b e unde r st o od at all,and they are ap parent ly loo sely inc luded
under the t e rm mamas . Th e brain , ma s ci si a ,i s ve nt ione d but a single t ime ,
and it i s not really c lear here that the t rair s meant . I t may however , be
re f erred\23 o the r plac e s under the word zc a j j a .
Among th e mat t er s o f int e re st which may be no te d in c onnec t ion wi th
the t reamlent of the bo dy , it s f unc t i on a s the ab o de o f soul i s impo rt ant .
Th e soul re si d e s in the heart,and in the inner c hamb er o f that o rgan . Thi t
inn er chamb er , known under many name s,as ment ioned above , thus b ec ome s the
mo st sac red plac e in the ent ire b ody . Thi s heart spac e , p robab ly the vent ri
c le,i s known throughout the who le range o f Upani sad li t erature . Whi le the
spa ce wa s prob ab ly made unown at f i r st th rough ac tual inve st igat ion , lat er
writ ers must have simply c o p ied the i r i deas from thei r p redec e s sor s , drawing
on thei r imaginat i on s to pi ec e out thi ngs to f i t in w ith their own sy st em s .
W e are seve ral t imes t old that thi s spac e and t he pu ru sa that dwedls in
it , i s the si z e o f one ' s thumb . wh ile th e soul t hu s oc cup ie s the heart during
o rd inary wak ing momengls , during sle ep i t wander s throughout the art eri e s and
vein s , b eing in i t s hap p ie st st at e when in the f iner one s . At t imes i t even
leav e s the b ody ent i rely,i t s vic egeren t i n tho se time s b eing t he b reath ,
o r prani . At the t ime o f death,i t l eave s th e b ody , t ravelling by way o f the
12
Gene ral Burg ey
art e ry susanna . Thi s i s the large st and mo st impor tant art e ry o f the bo dy ;
the f i rs t t o b e re f erred t o sp ec i f ic ally, and th e f i r st t o rec eive a sp ec ial
na me . Naturally one thi nk s o f the ao rt a in thi s c onnec t ion . But a study o f
the Upanisad s give s no ind icati on what ever o f it s re f erring t o t hat po rt ion
o f the b ody at all , but rathe r lead s one to f eel that it mean s the wind pip e .
Whit e th i s " art e ry" i s at f irst t ra c ed only as far as the palat e ,
whe re it i s
sai d t o d ivi de , it s b ranche s go ing t o the ey e s , it i s lat er b eli eved t o go
t o the c rown o f the head,where i t c onnect e s w i th the ant eri o r f ontanelle .
The soul , in d epart ing , spli t s o p en the skull at thi s po int . One c an admi re
the the o ri zing whicdpe d t o to thi s beli e f,and th e c lo se inve st igat ion o f the
skull , whi ch c ould not e the aig zag lin e s spli t t i ng an appar ent ly single
b owl o f b o ne int o many part s , and c omb i ning pre sent thi s hy pothe si s t o
ac c ount for the phenomena . But while the soul c ould depart by thi s rout e ,
and b y so doing ob tain immo rtalit y,rather r elea se , i t c ould al so depart f rom
some other spot,b ut in such case d id not at tai n t o et ernal bli s s .
Much c ould b e sai d ab out t h e int ere st ing word pre j a and it s f ellow s ,
add it ional t o what ha s b e en sai d . Thi s has not b een done b ecaus e a full in
ve s t i gat ion o f the word would lead one out si de of the Upani sad s . As far as
the f ive c ommonly named c ane s are c onc erned , th e evi denc e o f the Upani sad s
i s not that the word s for tham fa rs derived f rom th e c onre sponding c ompound
verb s , but that the verb s are all denomi nat ive s , dep end ing on the noun s .
I n regard t o the vexed que sti on a s to whether przna o r a pana o ri ginal ly meant
inb reath ing,th e w ri t er i s o f the o pi nion that th e fundamental di f f erenc e
wa s j ust what i s so c learly b rought c u t agai n and again in lat e writ ings
generally ; namely,that p r i nc alway s mean s the b reath in the lungs , and
apina the ai r in the b owel s o r lower part o f the b o dy . There i s but a single
pas sage in the Upani sad s whic h will not b ear thi s int erp retat i on , and thi s
pas sage i s almo st c ert ainly c o rrupt . while a few pas sage s out si de the Upanisads
13
Ge neral Survey
se em t o ddviat e f rcm thi s meani ng,a more c are ful sc rut iny of them woul d
p robab ly c lear things up . Certainly t o c onsi der i,
as f rom the b egi nning
th e wind i n the bowel s involve s le s s di f f icult y than to c onsi der it as eithe r
in o r out breathing . Th e inc rea s e ' of the numb er o f vit al ai rs f ro: f ive t o
t en and even t o f ourt e en in the lat e U panisad s , each with i t s own sgec ial
func t ion , i s i nt ere st ing , and th row s some light on the sub j ec t in gene ral .
I t would se em that the f undamental c onc ep tion o f oraaa,in lat er time s ,
at
any rat e , was that it was a sort o f wi nd or ga s,loca ted in some part icular
part o f the bo dy u sual ly ,d i f fu sed th rough it i n the ca se o f fy ii z and per
hap s some other s, and p er f ormi ng some sp ec i f ic func t i on .
T rina i s the b reath ,
as we u se that wo rd , an d p erf o rm s bo th in an d ou t breathing . I t i s to b e no t ed
in thi s c onnec ti on,that when a writ er o f the Upani sad s wi she s t o say b reath e
out o r i n , or b reathe upon,h e alway s u se s some c ompound othe r than pranic i
or apai i ti . as nihgrasat i . abhi ; r in1 :1 ,
and the like . O f all th e se air s
c rane i s chie f,and i n early time s i dent i f ied wi th the sen se s and wi th the
c rEna c on si dered as an ac t ive ,vi t al f o rc e wi thin one , and Wi th
the sens e s rec ogni z ed a s the t ool s o f the soul , wi th whic h prana was al so
i dent i f i ed , i t i s ea sy to see why the sen se s s hould b e c on sidered pr znz s .
I n c onnec t ion wi th the sen se s and t hei r o rgan s , the int e ۤt ing f ac t
may b e no t ed t hat for f our o f them amb iguou s word s are u sed , whi ch ma y re f er
t o ei ther t he sen se or i t s ob j ec t . Such word s are c ak su s . which may me an
either sight or the eye, crc tr i , ei the r the ear o r he
aring , t vc z , ei ther
t ouch o r the ski n , and ga ran’
. ei ther smell o r the no se . Alongsi de o f the se
are th e equally f ami liar word s L h § 1 , k arq c i nc ah . and n or nT‘
L . z,
which re f er exc lu sively t o the organ and not t o the sens e . As to how the
sen se s p e rf orm the i r func t ion s,nothing de f ini t e i s known b eyond that they all
d epend on inte lligenc e,which i s known under di f f erent na me s , and even
i d ent i f i ed wi th the dei ty . The mechani sm o f b rai n and nerve i s ent irely unknown .
The h eart,t o be sure
, as in o the r anc i ent peo pl e s , in c onc e rned with knowing .
15
General Surv ey .
i s ob tai ned through f ive sen se s o r power s,ea ch o f whic h deal s specially wi th
one o f the f ive el ement s which go t o mak e up the mate rial unive rse . The
mo to r part o f the bo dy mec hani sm i s sup pli ed by th e f i ve ac t ion sense s o r
power s , which are di rec t ed by the mind . Th e bcne s are the f ramework o f the
body , th e sinew s bind i t s part s t ogeth er . An inward f i re i s mai ntained in
the b ody,sup po rt ed by the union o f the vi tal ai r s . Th i s f i re ai d s in dige sti on
and i s an impo rtant f o rc e in the bo dy .
As t o the u se o f the bo dy in the Yoga and bhak t i sphere , nothing more
ne e d be sai d here . I t i s su f f is ent t o no te t hat it s po sture s and breathings
are a mean s of g rac eand through th e m it may se rve the soul by obt aining
release f o r i t .
As i s to be e x xec t ed , th e bo dy i s sa i d t o b e c ompo se d of th e el ements
which c on sti tu t e the material wo rld o f which the phy sic al body i s a part .
A f ew illu st rat i on s will be p re s ent ed here,to gi ve a pi c ture o f the general
i dea of the bo dy .
While generally f ive element s are rec o gni z ed throughou t the domain
o f Hindu philo sophi c al thought , Ch . 6 speak s of but thre e; earth,water
,
and t e whi ch inc lude s bo th heat and light . The se thre e ele ment s go
t o mak e up the bo dy , each one o f them separat ing into th ree part s The
separat i on i s a natural one and i s analagou s to that by which mi lk when
churned i s separat ed int o di f f erent part s,the bu t te r
,which i s the li ght er
and sup er i or part,ri sing to the t o p
,and the heavie r mi lk set t li ng to th e
m . bot t om. Thu s a nine f old divi si on o f the bo dy ari se s , as follovrs . (dv 5
Danae Med i um L ightEarth ( soli d part of f o od ) f ec e s
Wat e r urine bloo d
bone mar row
Th i s pas sage not only gi ve s a general v i ew of the c ompo si t ion o f the bo dy ,
as c ompo se d of ni ne part s,but show s how eac h part i s de riv ed .
Ano ther vi ew,ap parent ly eq ually old , i s f ound in Brh . where
the f iv e element s are inclu ded in the c ompon ent s of the t ody , along with
k nowl e dge,
m an a li f e,sight
,hearing ,
and c ert ai n mental quali t i e s and
ac ti on s . But thi s pas sage doe s not go int o dest ial . The lat e r Ga rbha howewr
su pp li e s thi s lack,and the elevifit s ,
wi th the part s derived f rom them and
thei r func t i on s are rep re sent ed as f o llow s .
04W I
Element Part deriv ed Func t ion
Earth Soli d Su ppo rt ing
Wat er Flui d Prepari ng food for dige sti on .
Warm. Giving light .
Di st ribut i on ( of f oo d eat en ) .
Ho llow Givi ng spac e ,
19
lone of the o lder Uxani qa is c ortr lns L e re ral de sc ril‘ion o f the
ho ly , but le e ~r rt ions ma y be sa i‘to
l eb in in the Jai trazan o tre
bo rde r l ine between ti e old n4 ti e ni d ‘le . L ore th de s c
ri pt i onr ax
t inoe i v i .h p e s s ir i sm .
“
t i s s a i l t o be wc rtlle s s,
r i ‘o
,os od o f b one s
,
s i i r , sinew s , mi rrow, f le e}
,se ed
,l i ce i
, pi leghr ,tear s
, or iu re ,u lne ,
W i nd , b all , an d sl ime . I t i s affl ict ed t ) lu st
,anger
, b re e d ,f ear , , eal
ou s, , sep arat i on fro the le si re d
,uni on Wi th th e non— de si re l
,l i nger
,
thi r st ,old ag e , de nt }
,di . ea s e , se rro J
, Cc . ( H ai t . l In g ai t . ? .f th e re
1 8 . no t’ er an i sim i lar de sc rip t i on o f it . I t wa s p ro iu c ei b ; c ort lat i on ,
p i e“i n da ra ne s s , c a n? ou t I 0 :h the urinary po rt al
,L S
i n lt u p v i th
t one s,c overe i wi th fl e sh
,boun ’ ‘ i th shin ,
f ille d W i th lung,urine
, b all ,
1
sli e,marrOW
,f at
,oi l
,an i hany o the r i mp u ri t i e s ,
lik e a c g. or roc e,tadi e .
Th e be st
gene ral i e sc ri p t i on of the bo iy i s to b e f ound in th e
N,ai r5.
'
r1n a Upani sad ; b et t er ti an that containe d ir Carbha,
he sau se le s s
abbre'
i a t e i . The de sc rip t i on i s 1mi te lat e
,
tu t _ t 1 8 c lear
,an ’
son 3 1 t le
f ron th e Hi ndu stan’p c int . I t s t ea zhing s roo t well back .
Nov the bo ly i s c ompo se d of t i e cart ) and ti e c tle r f our ole e nt s .
whatev er 1 8 soli d in i t,th at i s e art .
° wh a t ev er f lu i i,t h at i s u s tar;
wh a t e v e r i a b e t,th e t i s vha t eve r mov e s “h ou t
,tlat
'
3 ai r ; wl a ievo .
i s Iollow,that - s El
“~i . n e a rin; .na so f o rth a re ti e f ive “rou le d
ue 9 na 1.
the t i e the
Th e bar 1 9 ( func t i one d ) in‘
c
,
Apy m i n the ai r
,
N1 f i re , torgu e
f‘
thewat er
, r o se 12 ti e Ba l th And i r th i s (above ) o rd e r are tle f0 110W1n
ob ge c t s of sen se p ro duc ed i n the ear th and ti e otle r elorwnt s ; sound,t ouch
,
fe rn, ta s t e a n} s. ell . Th speech o r
van
,the hand s
,the f ee t
,ti e anu s
,
ai d tle ; e x - s are c alle d the worL se n se s . From ti s e e th e re are Iro‘
u sed 1. x
o r der ti e fc llov ir ~ o t,eot e i ) ti e e arth an ’
oti e r o’
ex nnt s :Aeocl ,
tal in
ti e f our f ol d ih rer o rg an . .u o a . , . c i G o d 1 ord x
20
ob j ec t s , d te rx i i n t ion un i urne rtr nty , arrre
‘f h nien r
i 'e
,an ! n info i r
i r».T h e l e gal i ty o f i s . n end o f th e ne zi ; o f b th : fa c e ; or
the hea rt ; o f th e h o vel . Th t o x e ~, sk i n
,art er i e
ha r r i fle e} a re c ox.os e d o f eart i ; u r i i e
, Ille glu ,1lr r l
,ser en
,ax
”
swee t , of wa ter; hunger
,t h i r e‘
, lc s si tt de ,fe ll: on
” c opulation,o f f i re ;
“C V lnb , dl L bi u b ,
s tillne s r,e p rni nL un i c lo sing ti e ey e s
,o f ai r; lu st
,
anb r , f ear , envy , f oi l ; and oti ere,from cound , touc h ,
form ,ta st e
and s ell are d ual i t i e s of tho e artl . Soun 1, touc h , forx'
n i ta s t e o f ti e
wa ter . soun l to n e }, and f o rn , of f i re . Sound and t ouch
,of ”
i f . Sound
A de sc r i p t i on of very di f f erent ty pe,ty p ic al o f the 1a . er Yo
ga
U,ani sa s d s , i s f ound in Tri q ikhi Eranu ana ,
CD If . It i llu st rat e s th e lh ab
ina . , par t s and relat ion shi p s t augh t by thaqschool .
" In the mi d s t of the bo dy i s .h e 0 h aving th e splégor of
les te d gol d . In h en i t i s thre ec ornere d,in duadrhp e d s ,
fou rc ornere d ,
round 11 l i r ’s,
S i x c o rnere d in c re epi ng tli l b s , and ei ght c orne red in
in sec t s . In it there i s somet i ig b line a glowi ng la mp . The I n ic '
t h e h a dbody of . wn,i s nine f inge f our finL e r s hi gh
,f our fing er s t read .
I t i s eL yshaj e d an
dobli iu e in l o th tW i c e born an i fou rfrot e d . That i s
rec oL ni z e i as the flu,i n the m i d s t o f which i s t i e havel . In thi s
tL e re i s a wheel wi th twe lve spoke s,in w h i ch are Vi snu and o t’e r f on ts .
I“t i l“119 0“ t?“”3 0 i s plac ed , a nd”f i rls aroun } ti e wle el wi t }
i t s own i llu si ons .
‘
i fe wand er s su cc e s s i vely a mc ang the sp ok e s , C Brdhz an ,
l in e a sg i de r wanderi ng in th e mid st o f her t ral of thread s . C -tlru t t’i s’
b reath-rai sing li f e do e s not . move . Above thi s i s the 1 1 O bll i4 °
and above the naval . I t ha s ti e for? o f thr e i L ht r*
‘
and i s an
e ib ht fold c i rc le , a c c ording to the e s senc e o
f wind,fi re , a c . I t eve x
rema i n s enc lo sing the si de s of t } TheUren t lig i t ,
L evin ent ere‘
and t ; b ean s of the mouth ,re c ogni ze i as ti e t rue ,
i n th e t i me of y o p a w it } i t s w it i 1 1 ! f i re,tre.
i l e s Wi tl ix fi e learthL GSO,
lavin‘the fora of a se rp ent . Two f i ngers ab ovr th e aru s
,and as ruc i below
we
ti e leni s , i s the a i dho d; o f h e r,tut the m i d heart o f i
undrure d s , an ! o f
1h
o ther shtle mid st o f the t : i t i s surrounded by many art eri e s ; lero tle
and J are L athe red toge tl er .”
As i s t o b e ax lec t e d in ti e moni s t i c phi lo spohy o f ti e Urani sad s ,
much st re s s i s lai d on the i n f e ri o ri t y o f ti e l ody to the soul,and on it s
delendenc e on th e sp i ri tual . Some t i me s th e re f e renc e i s to th e in divi dual
soul , which i s,how eve rx Inac t ic ally i d ent i f i ed Wl th the world soul , some
t ime s t o th e 5 x"
i n i t s large st sen se,somet i me s t o the Pl r l
‘l a nd
some t i me s to Erahm a, Narayana ,
o r t o the Dei ty wi thout any c lear ex p re s sinn
of naa e . But the s e are rather a que stion of the na me o f the atman or De i ty
rat her than any thing whi cl alt er s the t re atment 0”
the relat i on ship of the
De i t y to the bo dy .
Bac kbone
N i p ple
hollow above
Seat
Plans
Rib
Ab domen
Navel
St e rn !
Anu s
h ead
Crown of head
Forehead , an
Frontal Bone
Skull
Suture
do . j unc ture bra hmab i
Fac e
Ey eb row
Ey eli d
L y e la sn
ho se
do ,t i p of
do . c avi ty
Ohoex
L i p
Jaw
T eet h
T e ub ue
Cavi ty of sou th kaoc i
f
Palat e
Uvula
Palatal art er i e s taluk e
Mouth
Nec k
Arm
Shoulder
Elbow ,
Forearm
Upp e r arm
Wri st
Hand
do . bac k of
do . palm of
do . oxene d t ogethe r ,
Mi d dle
Thi rd
L i t t le
Hai l s
T i p of
Lo i n s
gu lpha
Foo t
So le of do .
Great t oe
hai r of bo dy
do . o f head
T opkno t
Beard
Pudenda
do . mal e
i s one o f th e ge neral t e r ms u sed cor th e enti re bo dy . It i n
not the e s sent ial part o f one ,but i s an ad j unc t to o r a de pendent o n the
or the I t i s c all e d bec au s e it l i e e” in the
f i re , - that i s , th e knowing,seei ng
,and d i ge st ive f i re s . ( Ca x bha
I n addi tion to what ha s t een said above in regard t o thdgene ral
c omp o sit i on of the body ,i t may b e add ed that i t i s c ompo sed of the f ive
el ement s and the f ive ( sound , touch,f orm
,tast e
, mnell ) . (Mai t .
Lat er i t i s f igurat ively de sc rib e s as a t emple,wi th one pillar ,
( the bac kbone ) , th ree po st s, (whic h th e c ommentary say s may b e tak en as
the th re e art e ri e s , or el se as the three quali t e i s ,
1 ni ne door s , ( the nine op ening s o f the b o dy ) , and the
f i ve dei t i e s ( the knowl edge sen se s ) . I t has a sun glowing wi th ray s ( th e
thought s ) , in the mi d st of which a f lame i s burn i ng ( int elligenc e ) , and the
de i ty wi thin i s a s large as a tongue 0 g thi s f lame . (Yo . ci .
Th e lat e st Upanisad s rep eat th e se ideas . Th e body i s woven t ogether
of the f ive element s . (Ye . Qu . 72 , gar . ,I t has the th ree (Yo . Qu .
It ha s nbne O p enings f o r exc ret i on s . ( 95nd.
The bo dy has th ree sexe s, to any of Which l i f e may be at tached . They
are , mal e , f emal e,and neu t er . ( QV e t . Many b od i e s p ervade the
earth . ( T ri p . LI.
The lat e y oga Upani sad s f ix the h ei ght of the bo dy at 9 C f inger , or
ab out 6 f e et . ( Qri j . Varah . Qand . Th e last al so add s that
ext end s 12 f inger s further b eyend the body . I t i s compo sed o f bone s;
sinew s, d c , and i s the home of the (hathar . 4 ) Ai r i s in i t ,
somet i me s sai d to be moving in i t . ( Yo . Ku . 6 6 ; Q ri j . I t i s
p e rmeat ed throughout b y (Yo . Cu . I t ca st s a shadow . (Varah .
I t s mo st impo rtant o rgan,that whic h su ppo rt s i t , i s the
(Varah . I t may b e made alende r — a thing much de sired in Yo ga -b y
holding the breath in the great to e s . (7534, Di sease s ent er i t .
75m} .
2 8
I t i s sp read thuou gh w i th ve in s,like r banyan leaf . (35nd. The
i s an impo rtant o rgan . ( do )
rhe ol der Upani sad s have qu i t e a lit t le t o say in rega rd t o the
b o dy and the sen se s . Ordinarily,o f c ou r r se ,
th e sen se s are in the bo dy ,
bu t they may d epart ,as in sl ee p and d eath . The ir departure mak e s u s c ry
ou t . ( Erh . Thei r departure al s o in j ure s the b ody . (D . A .
The departure o f the highe st sen se giv e s the great e st in jury . ( Oh .
When the sen se s d epart,they tak e the ob j ec t s of sen se w ith them
,which i s
a c o rollary o f the sub j ec t ive p sychology of bhe i r phi lo sopry . (Kaus.
The sen se s are sent throughru t the bo dy in dee p sl eep . (Erh .
Though i t i s the abo d e of th e sen se in thi s manner,nevert h ele s s Q
i t sel f i s a so rt o f sen se,and has -the func t ion of en j oy ing pl ea sure and
pain , sinc e it i s a memb er o f r‘
fi‘
. ( Kaus.
Among the lat e U panisad s , Kund . 4 menti on s that the ge rf*
u ob tains
th i ng s . It i s to be employe d askinst rument in knowing by a sc e t ic s .
Duriize
gle ep '
the bo dy en j oy s plea sure . ( Praq . I t has f our
stat e s , wak i ng,dreaming
,dee p sl ee p
,and th e f ourth , or
t ~n1~
(Narad . 5 )
‘
h. L l“
e. The inte lli gent sel f , o r r r d
"
r i s in th e body
lik e a raz or in a c ase . ( Kaus .
“r in? i s th e bo dy ' s mean s o f ac quiring
int elli genc e , for Without it th e bo dy would not re zogni z e p lea su re or pain .
( haus. B, 6 , Z) I ac t,the bo dy i t sel f i s voi d of int elli genc e
,lik e a c art .
(Malt . 80 thi s hi gher power di rec t s i t and mak e s i t sen sible . (Mai t .
By intelli genc e the body i s drivan around like th e wh eel of a po t t er . (Mai t .
Mi ra-mak e s r the di rec t ing pow e r o f the body .
Lat e c onne c t ion s ofr ’ “
o w i th int el li genc e ax v not so ma t t e r o f fac t .
The bo dy c ontai n s a two f ol d see d ( b ) one po rt ion of wh . ch i s breath or
pul sat ion,and the o the r st eady thought . ( Anna . That o f the asc et ic
or mu ni has a light in i t,which re f er s e spec i ally to the int ell igenc e c on
nec t ing him with the de it y . (Anna . Pac . 2 3 ; kathar .
M
2 9
The treatmen t of in it s relation t o th e i s
c onsi st ent th r e n n hOH t th e ent i re r
ange of U panisad li t era ture . Tarly and
mi ddl e U pani sad s rec ogni z e that th e or i s,in th e st ric t sen se ,
something apart f rom o r without the body . ( Praq . Erec t . Pana p . 7
Sub . 8 ) But the ( un der di f f erent na me s ) dw e ll s in the body . (Brh .
K . Free. Sub . Really,the wande r s in
every g ( Mai t . The dei t y sup po rt s all bo di e s . (ci ras
Fur )“ at tai ns the body at b irth . (Erh . The b ody i s the re st ing llac e
o f the immo rtal ( 0h . Brahma Within th e body i s the b readth
o f a thu mb . (Mait . 6 . The i s the lead er o f th e bo dy . (Mund .
I t i s lik e a light in the body . (Mund . The b o dy has a light i n it .
(Oh . The se pas sage s no doubt are the o riginal s o f tho se me nt ioned
in the last paragraph . In'
one plac e we are t ol d that exc i t e s the
f i re in the bo dy . (Hai t . The dwell s in the b o dy lik e the
wa te rdro ; on a lo tu s . ( Mai t . I t i s un it ed t o the bo dy lik e a ho rse to
a car . ( Ch . I t i s the chariot, of which the i s the driver .
( Kath . Mai t . Th e d ei t y i s in the b o dy in the same way that
oi l i s in se sa mum or sc ent in a f lower . ( Dhyana . 9 ) The in the body
i s the spi ri t of Prajapat i . ( Kaus The body o f th e i t sel f i s
(mai t . I t i s mo re sub t ile than the bo dy . (Brh . Ind ra
reali z e s that the atman i s mo re than th e bo dy . ( Ch .0 “
umk e s
the body int elli gent . ( Tait The change s of the bo dy do not change
the soul ,whi ~h en j o y s things the same in a dream as when awak e . ( Ch . 8 .
When the bo dy i s d e st roy ed the i s not hurt . ( K . wh en
i t l eave s the body i t mak e s u s c ry ou t . (Brh . I t should b e dram?
s t ead i ly f ro m the body,like the pi th f rom (Kath .
So,t oo , 061. 19 infonns u s that the dei t y dwell s in th e bo dy as soul .
Th e i s within the In some o f the lat er Upani
ead s we me et the di st inc i ton between -l i f e,
or the indivi dual soul
and or the righe r p ri nci pl e . Th e body c ontain s two and
The zd ddle Upani sa d s add that the body at death x ig le s with the f ive
el eme nt s, ( Find. 2
,and that it i s de s t roy ed . (Muk ti . I t fal l s in
death ( Chag . ) and one can no t go to h eaven with i t . (nae)St ill lat er
,w e are to ld that i t go e s t o de st ruc t ion , (Yo . Ku .
A lat e e shatalog dc al pas s age tell s u s that af t er death, baveng s e c onde d the
several c e le st ial regions, one yu t s off th e bo dy
,and put s on a
ele s t ial one . ( Tri p . H . A to 7 t r'
r i s obtai ned . ( T ri p . M .
-M Qu e .» ( U num b . g aw k t’u q U W i ld a, M A , W
'
U tu ( l 1 (
s~ l ’
s . Othe r exac t re f e renc e s are that the b ody o f th e
emb ryo at tain s the 8 and the six V“ in the eighth month .
( Carbha I t s heat i s the ‘c i d of Brahma . (Mai t . The wind &c are
wi thout the b o dy . ( Ch . I t i s obt aine d through g c od and 6 V ) 1 wo rk s .
( Sa rv . The penit ent has a p e a c etul one . (Ka iv . 4 ) I t i s sai d t o burn ,
f iguratively . (Va j ra . ) Krsna i s the dual cau se o f i t . (Copfile t . b eg . )
F‘i ~ rc ‘
ir e u se
s . I t i s a chariot ( Katha . Ch . Pai ng . , ChEg .
I t i s a sac ri f ic i al al tar . ( Pranag . 4 ) I t i s the fuel of the sac ri f i c e .
(hahana. I t i s th e g’
i for the i nt e rnal heat,whi ch i s Brahma . ( Mait .
I t i s a bow ,f o r which n or i s the arrow end
‘
r i na th e p oint . (Mait .
I n o rde r t o t e st th e i r su prenae y , the p r 1 leav e ahd re ent er i t .
(Kk au s. when death sac ri f ic ed and the “r xni c le f t him,hi s bo dy swelle d
u r and the mind wa s in hi m . (Brh . The a su ra e adordthe bo dy ano int
i t , and clo the it af t e r death,but they do not know Brahma . ( Ch .
C ert ain hsi s mi stalenly lo oked on the b ody as the e s sent ial part . ( Chac )“( M w
‘u f
tgt “(W {
it’s/am
c L'
Y ffL 'Q ’ M 0
;
V ~\ {00 1 /tA M (
fine shouldis e e the univer se
”
in hi s bo dy , (Yo , Yu . a pa s sage
which sugge st s the Gi te . The thre e f old bo dy 1 8 env elop ed in o . (Pflt G a )
Re l w e “ I) the d e sc ri p tion o f th e 7r d . the inner ruler,
th e i hmo rt al ,Where he i s t reat ed in the noni st i c sen se
,hi s b o dy i s sai d
t o be
rarth
,Wat er
,f i re sky
,ai r
,sun
,mc on
,the d i rec t i on , light ning ,
thunder , all the wo rld s,all knowledge
,all sac ri f i ze s , all b e ing s , breath ,
sp eech,si ght
,heari ng
,the mind
,t ouch
,bri lliancy , darkne s s , s ex on . ( Erh .
3 — 23 ) A much lat er pas sage u se s much the amp s language i n regard t o, j b
the body of Naray ana . whi ch earth,wat c r
,bri llinn c y ,
air,sze c s ,
the mind ,
int elligenc e , ego i sm,
re f l ec t ion,the tempe ra ment
,the impe ri shable
, all
b eing s . ( Sub . The dei ty a s surf; a body when in fatuated l y hiya. ( Kalv .
Tart t i s the body of sp eech,heaven of mind , and wat er of b reath . (Brh .
11
With the ado rat ion o f t he wo rd 0 it s body and that of i t s several
l et t e rs may be theu ght o f . Th e Garhapatya f i re,the e art h
,and nrahma are
eac h in turn the bo dy of the of O J . (Prahmav . 3 — 5 x has thre e .
L at e r U p ani sad s empha si z e t”e f ac t that th e i i i ; dei ty i s wi thout
Varadot . 3
bo dy . (Cri j . 38nd. 2; Harad . Yet he i s i n o ther bo di e s . (Cri j .
Harad . Ag ain ,the bo dy of the deit y i s re f e rred
,to , an d sai d
to b e lo tu s like . ( Tri p . M . Z . I ) Th e great ways of the deit y i s hi s spo rt
bo dy . ( T ri p . M . Si ta, ( as prakrt i ) has bodi ly f orm s . ( Si ta) . The body
o f th e moon swell s . (Bash . )
Wit ‘
c a. As a fundamental pro po si t i on
,sin s are in th e bo dy .
( Ta i t . Henc e i t ha s t o do Wi th l )By hav ing c on f i denc e
in c e rt ain t eachings,
one r se e f rom thi s bo dy, at tai ns an exc ellent b o dy o f
l i ght , and abi de s i n hi s own f o r m. ( C h . One who do e s not at tttn
wi sdom b e f o re the de st ruc t ion o f th i s body has b oyhoo d in the c reat e d
wo rl d s . (Kath . Th e re i s a prayer that the b ody may be p eac e ful .
( T ai t . Al so that it may b e all- see ing . (Narad . 4 . end ) . By p re p er
mant ras , one in thi s bo dy na y s ee the go d s . (Nrsp . 5 ) Th e a sc et ic should
( Mait .
p e rc eive sel f f rom hi s own b o dy . He 1 8 sai d to a sc end into hi s own body .
( San. )That o f t h e dead i s rep ro duc ed th r ou gh th e offe ri nc of t en pinqas .
Winds 9 )
I . the lat er Upani sad s the i dea gr ow s that the body na y b e u sed as
a means of ac qui ri ng me ri t . One may mak e hi s eat ing and drink ing an o f f er ing
in hi s bo dy . ( Prfiaag . Ashe s should he pu t on the b ody . (Erha j .
But i s e sp ec ial ly in yoga prac t iée s that the b o dy mu st b exe rc i sed . The
bo dy p ro duc ed by the f i re o f Yo ga -asc et ic prac t ic e s - i s no t sub j ec t to
i llne s s , old age , and pain -an i d ea f requent ly rec urring in the Yoga Upafi
l ea d s . (Cve t . In t hi s c onnec t ion w e have an in t ere st ing dax x x iaXi
d e f ini ti on o f th e wo rd ta a The c on suming o f the bo dy by c ert ain p rac tic e s
ac c o rding to th e sc ri pture s i s a (gang. Th e b ody i s dried up by
f % 1 F "7 It should p er f o rm penanc e . (Kund . It i s to b e kept
even o r ri gi d in Yoga . (Yo . Cu . One rec eive s li fe or exi st enc e f rom
c e rtai n fonns of Yoga . (Yc . Cu .
Correc t breaéing has i t s relat i on t o t he b o dy in Y oga . Breath i s
re moved f rom. the bo dy i n the b r ah. e v i f deans . ( Tri c .Th e bo dy i s wo rn
away li ke a c loud by S a ndra . ITrig . Prop er b reath i ng de st roy s the heat
of the b ody . (70 . Ku .v oga give s one a slender t o dy - ~ e sp ec ially the
p rac tic e of ho ld ing th e b reat t the great t o e s . (Cri j . Qand .
The asc e tic whil e in the bo dy shoul i re fl ec t on hi s i dent i ty W i th
Brahma . (Karad . Soul doe s no t have b ody af t e r me ri t and si n are de st roy e d .
(Cri j . Thi s lead s int o th e p e s simi st i c vi ew of the bo dy . One should
b e as i f vo i d o f a bo dy . (Varah . The bo dy i s not to b e e st eeme d .
( Narad . I n fa c t ,i t i s t o b e abandoned b y the a sc et ic , ( Narad .
and that o f the f or f i f th c las of asc et i c s,i s t o b e c ondi dered
a s dead . (hire d . 5 . And in ene ral ,the asc et ic i s to look uxon hi s
& r a e d ub t d L u t u N !
bo dy as a c orp se . (Harad . 7. b eg . ne bec ome s 0 }"
c by say i ng "no, no" .
( Varfih . The asc et ic c on si de rs knowledg e as hi s bo dy,and abandon s al l
thing s out si de hi s bo dy . ( Narad . 6 beg . ; 9 ,end ) . The afflic t io n s of the body
are to b e endure d,c almly by the asc et ic . (Narad . But he i s not to
af f lic t hi s b ody wi th too muc h o f eitner pl ea sure or pain — t hey w oul d
int erf e re wi th hi s Yoga pur sui t s . ( Yt . Kanthac
. The bo dy i s
someth ing 1 i or i magine d . (Hamap Go ing f arther bac k , hi ng Hqh s d
ratha c on si de red i t as something t ran si to ry ,aux (Malt .
And even
Brh . 4 . 4 . 12 say s there i s no reason Why one knowing the hhould se ek a bo dy .
o f the ai r s o f i and 1“
ai r c ont i nu e s 1» (Yc . Cu .
b od ie s,say ing Hanan . 2 )
t he b ody,
one l ive s . T reatl
s up portst h e b ody . ( Qrf j . As long as
i s in all
The bo dy i s plac ed at the top of the sc ale of l i f e, gra s s b ei ng at
the bo tt om . (Anna .
One abandon s th e b o dy at death . ( K516 g . 2 ; Ndrad . l ;Haya . ,
al so cal led d "
Avyaht a
( Saflb4b . 27; the soul leave s i t ( Pinda . 2 ; hund 20 )
Tu rf) . Death i s
”NAnna . One separat e s from the body
P hilo so p hic ally t he bod y i s d i st ingui shed
b y the f ac t that the ego or b
whi lc th e non-eg o or
in regard t o i t s re lat ion t o the
The sup reme spi ri t i s sup e ri o r to i t . (Hi r5 . ) The 5
(Adhya. 56 ) though i t al so b ec ome s separate frdjm th e bo dy .
dwell s in i t , (Ra ha s . Narad .
dwell s Wi thout . (Ra has . Ge n tli c t ing st at ements
vo ic e d i f f erent sy st em s o f philo sophy .
i s in the b o dy .
(Anna .
Th e olde r Katha t ell s u s that thrwei ty i s i n the b ody , but i s to rn away and
f ree d f rom i t . ( Katha . He i s even in the b ody of t he (Vara h.
I t i s i a . ( Shanda 10; Tri o . b eg) . I t i s the hou se of the go d s , in
one of the mid dle U pani sad s . (0vet . i x i xsx atnax xfihxinx x x xfiiThe deity dwell s
in th ree plac e s in the body ; the ey e,th e mi nd , and the heart . (Gau d .
I t sp rang f rom Visnu's . (vasu ) . On the o ther hand
,the body
wi th the i (Kund . 15 ) I t i s or really the re i s
( Adhya. l A nna . A rec on c i ling st at ement i s that the
a po s se s sor or a non- po s se s sor of b ody . (Hai t rey i . No
ari se s f rom the fac t that the bo dy i s no t real . ( Adhya. 59 ,
i s really no t th e b ody . ( Qri j . I t i s pervad ed by
i s b o rn in i t, (Yo . Ku . and w o rk s harm to
I t i s i n the power of ( Tri p . M . I t has erro r s .
I t has f ive de f ec t s,- ~ lu st
,anger
,out — b reathing , f ear , and
Th e i s a li gi t . (Bhav . ) The
( Yo . Ku . I t b ec ome s th rough pri de of
i s not c onn ec t ed
no in it .
de i ty i s neith er
d oub t thi s
60 ) . Henc e , one
( T ri p . M .
it . (Varah .
(Adhya.
sl ee p . ( Mandal fil
i s in i t du r ing li f e .
flare d . 6 . b eg ) .
But i t s i s d e end ent on (05nd.
The body i s c o . p er ed t o t i e und er o f the two fire s t i c k e , the wo rd
b eing the upp er and revolv ing one,an ! knOW1e lge the spark produc ed by
thei r f ri c t ion . ( } v et . D hyana .
P In the la t er Upani sa ds , af f l ic t ions i nd re st rain s o f the
bo dy play a mo st i mpo rtant part,as w e ll as ab strac t i on . The spi ri t in the
b od y i s 0 0 b e seise d by re f l ec ti on on the my st i c r (0vet . By { ro
nounc ingthe nasal d f c in a c ert ai n method
,an invi sib le bo dy i s obtaine d .
(Bab es 10 . By rel ec t i on on Brahma a thi rd st at e of univer sal lo rd ship i s
att ai ned at thr d i s so luti on o f the b o dy . 7vet . The asc et ic should
re st rain hi s body . ( Trio. I n a c e rtain the measure o f the bo dy
i s mnrs e d on the ground . ( Tric, . I t should b e thin . Trig . 106 ,
Yoga i s to b e p er f o rmed in it . ( Varah . fixfiifi I t i s a b an“c or t ie ,
b ecause i t b ind s the soul . ( Sarv . I t i s to b eabahdone d
the asc e t i c . ( Anna . I t should li e like a st ic k o f woo d . (Amrt a .
It i s b O b e the only thin g le f t to the asc et ic , (Narad . 5 . b eg . ; and
i t s o nly p rot ec t i on f o rm c old and wi nd should b e the or c lo th(Narad . 4
, end)wo rn ove r the
.Apno should b e as obl iviou s to pl easure and pai n as a
b o d y Without b reath . ( Narad . Fv entually i t should b e ab an ione d in flhe
c av e s o f the mountai n s ( Narad . 4 . end ) . Sti ll, one should rememb er that
he has a b o dy ( Narad . and for i t s p re se rvat i on may beg . (Mai t re y i .
There i s a p ray e r that it may b e nouri she d . ( Dat t a .
It s b ehe st s are not t r b e ob eye d . (Adhya. 3 ; Ak si . I t s
or i nm g inat i ons are to b e abandoned . (Wi re d . 5 . b e g . ) L ileW i s e i t s enmi ty ,o
pri d e,and anger
. ( Hi re d .a
. 42; sauhn.
2
i;iix ,Ya j . 19 ; al so i t s a
’
fec t
ion s . ( Narad . The a sc e tic has a b o dy d i st i ngu i sh e ! by knowledge and
(flare d . A c o rrec t unde r sta nd i ng of the di f f e renc e s of
bo dy i s ob tained by re f lec tio n o Brahma . ( dare d . Re f l ec ti o n should
tak e po s se s sio n o f the b o dy . (Ad hya. Knowledge of i t i s re f e rre d to,
(Varfih . I t s O pin ion s are to be drawn f rom i t in Yoga . ( Q rT j .
Th ing s wi thin and w vthou t at ! are to b e cons idordd the same . ( Anna .
The high e s t st at e i s to b e wi thout the bo dy, ( Adhya. 16 ) Thi s i s th e stat e
o f the a (Muk ti . 2 . 3 3 ) Thi s rele ase i s ne i as sary in o rd e r to
ob tain the high e st st at e , (Ahsi . and i s ob tained by ( Ba ubh .
Yet one With or without the body may ob taan re lease . (Anna .
The spac e in i t i s t o b e mingled wi th ext eri o r spac e . (gri j . When
p e rvaded b y —h ere a form of Yoga -one has no f ear of death . (70 . Cu .
It i s to b e f ree f rom the bond s of t ime . (YOQ - hu .
Correc t b reathing play s i t s part s in the Yoga Upani sa d s . The bo dy i s
t o b e f i ll ed and emp t i ed like a j ar in th e se b reath exerc i se s . ( Trig .
As long as remai n s in the bo dy,
r
'
fi c should b e re st rai ned . (Yo . Cu .
Thi s b reat h ing d e st roy s the heat in the b o dy . (Yo . Ku . and
ove rc ome s wearine s s in i t . (Yo , Xv
Variou s part s of the bo dy are a s si gned to c ertain
One seei ng i a i s in a f o rtunat e b od y . (gri j . That of the yo gin i s
b ri lliant . ( tSaubh . I t s c onnne c t i ons are but illu si on. (Ni rva )(Vara i . 3 . 18 )
0 ' Th e deit y i s without bo L y . (Kaiv . ado rned
wi th the b o dy o f Janki . (REmEp . 32 ) . S§ vi tr and Savitri hav e b od i ed f o rmed
l ik e the sun . The Brc wa s pro duc ed in the body of Ganeca .
(Varadot . Ganapat i t ell u s that Ganapat i has su rpas sed the three b o die s
At the c reati on,c reatu re s wi th large b od ie s were c reat ed to f right en
Brahma on a c c ount o f hi s p ri d e . (Varadot . 3 )
I n addi ti on t o tho p e s simi st ic mat t ers no t ed ab ove , und er the head
of re l i giou s ref erenc e s,th e bo dy i s immeasurab ly vi l e , (Yukt i .
Yo . Ku . Qri j . i s empt y . (Bhav ) .
The u se of b egin s fa igiy e arly,though no t in th e old e st Upan
isad e . I t i s mo st fre qu enly u se d in some po e t i cal ,f i gurat ive , or reli giou s
( Gaud . In dee p sleep one has a re splendent body . ( Sub .
By meg s o f the spac e ir(i t we get a knowledge o f spac e in gene ral .
The dei ty i s in the bo dy . (Vari h. I t pe rf o rm s wo rk s, (Mahan .
Narad . 1)6 6 ) gag. I t i s one o f th e in st rument s by which one
b ene f i t , dc . , and su f f er s af f lic t ion . (05nd. I t su f f er s t rou‘le s .
(Brhama Th e soul do e s no t nazya a bo dy . ( Ice
Release f rom th e b o dy i s hard to obtain . (Varah . The me re dr yhu;
£L L D WflL “D
up of th e body i s notrto b e near the d ei t y . (VarE h . Th r muni
should not hat e wi th i t, ( Narad . but should think int ent ly on Brahma
Mind in i twi th it . ( Narad . xx should b e c onc ent rat edfi in Yoga . ( 95nd.
Th rough such c onc ent rat ion,the divi si on of the body i s under st ood . (05nd.
I t should b e k ept rigi d i n Yo ga and it s vari ou s .s (Varah .
T ri g . so, 9 1, 14s, Yo . Cu . 71; sand .
" c ‘
i i s u sed only in th e later Upanisad s , largely in tho se dealing
wi th Yoga . I t i s sp rung f rom one ' s parent s , ( Adhya. and c ompo sed of
f i lth and f le sh . (Adhya. The s y e
The y ogin v i ew s hi s as a c o rp se . ( Para mah . Tu rf ) . Yoga
should b e p rac t ic ed wi th i t . (Yo . T rembli ng of the b ody ind ic ate s
a. me dimn degree o f Yoga power,e rec t one a high degree . ( Tri g . A
re spl e nd ent bod y i s ob t ained f ror a f o rm of yoga . (Yo . Cu . 5 .f 3) .
A loan one i s ob t ai ned f rom i t: I t goe s to re st .
(Varah . That o f man i s not rel ease d . ( Adhya. I t should beAy adh .
emp loy ed 1 begging,bathings
, do . (Avahh .
Th e deit y has as hi s bo dy . ( Maya . That o f Hay agriva i s
p ranava and ( T ri p . M . The sun and moon do no t po s se s s a body
for the (Anna . nor do they shine for one who i s in t he
hi ghe st stat e . ( Ru drah .
i s u sed but a few t i me s . I t i s rel eased i n death . (N5da . l9
Tha t of t he dei t y b ec ome s an cffe ril ing and emi t s v (hu dg . 2 )
15 2“
gafihara under stand s bfn i n Free. 2 . 23 x 2— 4 t o mean the b ody,thoug
i t do e s not po s se s s thi s meaning el sewhere .Dr
‘
u. i s sai d to uphold i t .
The Bone s
The re i s l e s s ment i on of the bone s in the Upani sa is than one mi ght
exp ec t , in vi ew o f the i r importanc e in th e b ody ,b u t a s the wri t e rs of
t he U pani sad s deal t mainly wi th ext eri or thing s,thi s i s not su rp ri sing .
fs i s the only wo rd u se d . Th ey c on sti tute one of the c omponent s o f
th e body . ( Kni t . Atma. l ; Narad . 4 .
“l; Tri g . 5; Kamthar . 17;
Yaj . 5 ) They f o rm one of the six lo ; . s or envelo p e s of the b ody .
Varah . 10) They are one of the 15 part s of the s t af f . ( Tai t .
The ; co rre spond t o the inne r woo d o f a tree . (Brh . 3 . 9 . 28 ) The bo dy i sMai t .
b ilt u p by means o f th em»(Xi x x d x xfixfifi) . They are th e p illar s o f t h e
b o dy . (flare d . 3 . 4 G ) . In the tri - el emental scheme of Oh . th ey are
but Cgarir . say s th ey are f o rmed f rom earth .
sai l to be c ompo sed of the c oar se part of the t s
]" f c on sume
d‘Gartha 2
say s that they are developed f rom s: yu . or sinew , th ough the wo rd al so
sugge st art i lag e . Garbha 5
,in it s exa ct enume ration , sazs that the re
36 0 b one s i . the bo dy,as compared wi th the 200 u sually given by Ana t omi e s
not inc luding the t ee th . They are [ e r 1eat e d ‘y the n
°
g a ai r , ( Tri c ,8;
gang . and i t s c ompanion ai r s . (gri y . They help to eu round th e
l n ( Varah . The one in the mi d dl e o f t he ba ih i s like a lu t e
st af f . (gri j . T . 10) .
I t i s wo rthy o f no te tlat tlr only sp e ci fi ) t one s me nti oned are
the ba ca t one
,th e rib
,the f ront al bone ,
and the skull ,wh ic } are di s c u s sed
41
TO L 9 8 ‘o
here along wi th the zart s of the body in wh ich th ey are f ound .
” he bone s o f gikalyu'
wrr c arr i ed o ' t by robb er s,who
“I u
vlt they
were something el se . (Trh . I n the my st ic al se ari fi ze ,they are
ver se s . ( 3h .
Ja s te i s something not dep end ent on hous e . ( hi rfi . ) In a mant ra the
are sa i d t o become as a or d iagram . Tho se of th dea i are
rep ro du c ed wi th the fou rt h. rn g ,a ou t of the t en offe re d . ( Pih laS ) .
Co ssi c ally , the mountain s are sai d to h e lre du c e d f rom the t one s
o f Pra gap at i . ( Su‘
. Tho se o f ti e sac ri f ic ial ho rse i n the great if
”
c a are th e c on st ellat ion s . (Erh . They f orm ti e f rame of the
fi g p rati ve chari ot .
T en se,f l sh , i s fre iu ently ment ione d as one of t he c om1onent s o f
the body . ( Tai t . Mait . Itma. 1; Sub . 8 ; Har a i . ,28 ;
T rig . 5; Adhya. 3; Ya) . I t i s one o’ th e six envelo pe s of the bo iy .
(Hu dg . 3 ; Varah . The F ody i s smeare d e ver wi th f le sh . ( H al t .
flare d . I t i s c ompo sed o f the me di u r elehent of the food c onsune d ,
U O F G BIO L dlng t o earth . ( Ch . gar . al so say s that i t i s comro se i o'
earth . In the f o e tu s,i t i s sai d to he dev elop e d f rom blood , and fnam it
f at i s develop e i . tCarhh s . 3 ) Ti e re i s a hall of f l e sh and l lood in th e
heart . ( Su‘ .
h e mas se s of fle sh c omp o sing th e
‘ody are l i k e th e vo c i o f t re e s .
F gh . Tla sl i s u i \0h . l9 . 1) .
t a The cu s ton c’ st i rring the i smain e o
f a f ather or etle r reldz i ve o
th e f une ral y y re ,W i t } a pok er ,
that the,
may b e the bet te r comen . si, i s
re f erred to an 1 iec lare d to t o not re ' re h s r s ible ns e the sg i r i t has
Th e fle shdePart fi d
, (OT 7-15 Tha t 0’ a woman i s to h e ave i
‘ed the a scot lz
(Ya ) . Saste dc e s rot c onsi st in rle e} . The fle et c f the dead
i s re p ro du ze d h, th e o f f ering o f ti e sec ond o f t } ten pig t piaga 4)
enve l u , s of t he bo dy . th u d“. 3 )”
t l d 1”
r 1 rasa , or li d u l l0
p a r t of one ' s to d ,i £ 1 0“ 1 i s do 1
.
‘
d . 1 f l h} . rli a
a01 d h l t . some : it t
’
e s ou ) ,i t form s the omb r
,o . ( Car’ha I t lelp s
of t i e t en o f fere d, k
“1
.43 I: L a hdn . i ere s
,ray er t . i t
i s u se d only 1L lat e UIani sad s . I t i s comp o se } of wate r , ( 95rd
I t i s a part of th e body (Y § J . one of th six ko ;’
(Varih . I t i s
selarat e d by 1rfn1 . ( Qand . I t i s dried up by th e 1 a1i d fll Cht f t er
death . (Y n u . Ni ra. inforr s u s that c a st e do e s not c on si st i n
b lo o d .
ABT i J al so aplear s only i n the lat er Urani sad s , though i t i s an
old t o rd . I t i s an element o f th e b o dy . ( Tri g . 5: Harad .
?. 4C
,
A r uni dent i f i ed word t ells u s that fi x i x b loo d i s ti e oil i n t he
f i gu rat i ve cha r i ot .
Pa t i s al so in f re q uently ment i oned in the Upani sa'
d s . T wo Word s are
u sed for i t . i s the mo re c omx on word,bu t i s a lit tle ambi
v( u s , as
i t ma y al so mean lymph .I t i s f i r st ment i oned in hai t . as one o f th e
impurit i e s of ti e 1o iy . I t i s seve ral time s ment ione l a s one o f t i e c om po
nent e o f the body , ( Su b . 8 ; Nare d . 4 .7f ; T rig . 5 ) or 0 1 6 o f it s six
(Va f ifl 1-10 ) If the eb b rze i t ari se s f rom tle Fle s h , un i f rom i t , in turn ,
c ome sath e sin ew s . tCarbha I t eu round s th e J tVarEh .
T h t
we iu t m i o f the f at in th e b e d ; i s 1 or on 8 . M art ha 5 )
i s menti oned on i e i n ) onne ct ion wi th the i n RdmRI . 74 .
The asc et i c in st rolul at o li q li s t , to [ r ven t i ns rc t se c f
V i s u se d bu t Oh i o ,in Wai t . wle re
7
i s ment i one l as one
o f the impur-ti e s of ti e body . A s i s ment ioned in t he BG J O li st
,va
"
mu st b e something di f f erent,but i s e vi dently some o il‘ or f at ty sub stanc e .
M a r r o e
i s ment i oned fI OL the earli e st Upani sad s on . I t i s in ran lik e
the pi th of a tre e . (Erh . I t i s c ompo se d o f the mediu n element of
t.
c onsu med . ( C ) I t i s a } impuri ty . (Mai t . 3 .A ) . I t b: i s
rep eat edly menti oned as one of t he part s of t he bo dy . ( Tai t . Zai t .
Etna. 1; Har
ad . 4 . 2f ,28 ; Trig . 5 ) I t i s one o f the
‘
r of th eV rah
body . (Mu dg . 3 ; Varfih . I t su rround s th e Céifi x .
Garbha 2 t ell s u s that i t i s develop ed f rom b one,and that semen i s
p rodac e d f rom it . In Garbha 5 there i s a pu z cling me nt i on o f 500 i n
th e b o dy . The s zhe li a st sugg e st s mu sc l e s,but thi s hardly seems l ikely .
I f the pas sage i s no t c o rrupt,th e wri t ermay re f er t o sec t i on s of ma rrow
in d i f f erent bone s,and p e rhap s inzlu de the apparently separat e g ranule s o
as well as marrowsec t i on s o f the brai n . Per sian r
;mea ns b rai
3&and i s etymologic ally
C o nnec t ed , t hrough Ave st an “La and Q Pahlavi and thi s may throw
some light on th e s ub j ec t .
Marrow i s me nt i oned as food in Ch . whe re it i s th e rule o f
one who s now s th e w
”
int erwoven in th e body ,no t to eat
marrow for a y ear . or not at all . The c onnec ti on seems t o be that he do e s
no t have ne e d o f thi s choic e mo r sel,a s hi s knowle dge mak e s him gre t and
dt rong without i t .
i s sai d t o be the I L or c adenza in the sac ri f c ial chant .
( Ch . Th e “arrow of the dead is re r ro du c e d by the 4th of tho
and evi dently varia nt s , are the wo rd s u sed { or sinew or
t en don . No t much i s sai d ab out th em . F rom the old e r Ufiani sad s on they are
rec ogni z ed as a c omp t nent of thebody . ( Tait . Hai t . Ndrad .
a atnar . 17; YR ) . 5 ) T hey f orm one o f the of the bo dy . (Hudg . 3 )
T ‘e y are like th e inner bark of a t ree . (Erh . They bind the t o dy
to ge ther . ( Narad . 3 . 4F ) . where are 9 00 of th em . ( G arbha 5) They are devel
o p ed f rom fat,and f rom th e m c ome s the bone . (fix hk Garbha Th ey are the
harne s s o f the f i gurat i ve chari o t t o Whi c h th e bo dy he lik ened .
The Sh in
i s s sl i g ht ly amb iguofi word,as it 1 8 u sed not only f or th e
sk in bu t al so fo r th e s en se or t ouch But it s main u se i s for the skin ,
and the relati on s of th e two i dea s a r e do c lo se that i t i s har dly nec e s sary
to do mo re than c all at tenti on to the dual meaning of the word .
F rom the earli e st time s i tjEFunc t ion a s the o rgan of t ouch wa s
rec ogni z ed . I t i s the si t e of all t ouch . (t . I t i s one
of th e fe t t r r s or grasp er s of the body,having touch as i t s f unc tion .
(Err. Lat e r Upani sad s repeat thi s fa c t . (Garbha 1; Karad . 6 . beg . ;
Tri g . l . be g . ; CErIri ha ment i on s i t as the o rgan o f t ouch , an i add s that
i t s f iel d of ac tivi ty i s the air. I t i s one of the knoweldg e se n ses .
(Varah . 2 ) I t i s one of the s i x env elo p e s of the bo dy . (Varah. 10; Xu dg .
I t i s one of the f o r ms o f ( CEr . ) I t i s one If the seven element s
o f the b o dy, 6nd one of it s 16 power s . I t i s one o f the par t s o f
the body . ( Tai t . ima Ktma l ; Napad . 4 . 2F ; Yd j . 6 ) Blood flow s f rom
i t like sap f rom the bark of a t ree . (t . One c an no t tak e Foo d
Wi th i t ; i f th i s w e re po s sibl e,the mere touc hing o f f oo d would sat i s f y .
hAi t .
The lat e Tri s
. c onne t s i t wi th t } e el ement fi re ,and th e Yoga
f i s a wo rd whi ' h ha s a b road u se to d e e lbnate part s o f any thinL
a yart f rom i t s u se t o indi c ate a part o f the bo dy . 2o tb the se u se s ext end
th roughout the enti re Upani sad p eri od .
Early menti on s are that T r “.
i s e s sent ial to the li f e of the limb s,
f o r f rom what eve rmmembe r “ r'
_ go e s away,that limb wi the rs
, (Erh .
The limb s are held together by ai r - st rung t ogethe r a s by a th read -and i t
i s a say ing that the limb s of a dead p er son have b ecome un strung . (Erh .
or relaxed . The ( sub t i le ) b o dy i s relea sed from the limb s . (Brh .
O f t he f ive vit al ai r s,e l i s du ffu s e d th roughout all the limb s .
(Amrt a .
”
a. c ar ri e s the f ine el ement o f f o od to each l imb . (Mait .
A lat e y oga Uzani sad te ll s u s that di sease s of th e li mb s may be
cured by c onc ent rat ing the ai r in the af f ec t ed memb er s . ( Tri o .
Al l the unin j ured limb s c on st itut e th e bo dy .to
“5
or e s senc e of all the limb s c on st i tut e s semen . ( Ai t . The son springs
f rom hi s f ather ' s limb s . ( Kau s. When a woman i s imp regna t ed , t h e
semen b ec ome s like he r own limb s,and so i t do e s not har m her . ( Ai t .
Th e limb s may po s se s s b eauty, ( Narad . and soundne s s , ( Anna ,
wh i l e wearine s s i s c au sed by the exerc i se o f th em ,
"a
“s e c
“ c . Th e deity c ome s in c ontac t Wi th t he limb s .
( Qi ra s . Breath i s the e s senc e o f the limb s,h enc e it i s c alled an
r
f rom Lfi r -c (Erh . Simi larly the u‘ i s th e e s senc e
of the l imb s and 7 i r so .( Ch .
Th e y Z‘ hymn 1 8 int erwov en
wi th vari ou s memb e r s o f th e bo dy - the hai r
,ski n
,f l e sh
,bone
,and marrow .
( Ch . The ten sen se o rga ns are said to be th e l imb s slru ng f ror
int elligenc e,
t
r (ésa s. The soul i s said t o be sev0 1 l imb ed inVaradot . 1)
i t s wak ing and dreaz ing st at e s . ( Nrsp . 4 ' 1liSubti le 1 li mb s are
ob tai ned af ter death . ( Tri p . M . Perf ec t li mb s may be ob tained
through knowledge of c e rt a ' n philo soph i c t ru th s . ( 0h .
In one pla t e the wak ing stat e i s said t o have ei ght l imb s , (hdrad .
Th e soul i s sai d to have three l imb s . ( Pacu . 5 ) Hari i s sai d t o b e
in the l i mb s of one . Th e limb s o f th e w or ship per are through
the lri e st ident i f i e d with the sac ri f ic ial ve s elka. ( Kanthaq . l ) . Th e
l imb s of the kn u‘
r‘
: are onc e ment ione d and sai d t o be f ine . (Advay .
The dei t y i s sai d to c ome in contac t wi th th e limb s . ( Qi ras . 4 )
As an i llu st rat i on . the t ortoi se 1 8 sai d to gath er hi s limb s toge ther ,
and one should in th e same way draw in hi s sen se s . ( Ksu ri . 3 ; Narad .
Th e limb s are mentioned (h e re in a charmThey are rubb ed in a charm . (Kau s.
during c o iti on . (Brh . Lat er Upanisa d s rev el in th e use o f th e
l imb s in rel igi ou s and rituali st i c way s . One lin e or t reatment i s p re sente d
by the rubb ing o f ashe s o r put t ing the tfle ér or on
var iou s part s of th e b o dy . Ashe s are ment i one d in Brha y .
Ebs ens . 2 ; Dak s. 8; The t " generally of sandalw ood past e , i s
en j o i ned in Vasu . ,Go pi . Bu t in V o ws the limb s bec ome v ery imp o rt ant .
To b a s i n w i th,one w ith d e f e c t iv e l imb s can not b ec ome an as c et i c . (flare d .
3 .23Then c ome numerou s rather ind e f ini t e men ti on s o f their emlloyment in
Yoga , u sually f ollowed by sp ec i f ic c ommand s as to what i s to b e done wi th
eac h memb er conc erned . Saubh . b eg . ; Saras . b eg; Bak e 15 ; Duk e. 1;
U sually the employment of e ight l i mb s i s en j oi ned, ( Trio. 23 ; kathar . 6 ;
Gri j . Varadot . 6 ; Varah . 5 . 10 )whic h may b e made pure by repeat
i ng a c e rtain mant ra . (Hays . 4) Onc e the employment of six limb s i s oc tman ded .
And onc e the re st raint o f th e eight limb s i s a b i r
’
h '
. ( Mi ra)(Yo . Ku . Thei r abandonment o r ove rc oming i s al so a nec e s sary thing .
( huht i . Hays . 4; Somet ime s they are to b e rubb ed in Yoga . ( Yo . Cu .
41) They are to b e employ ed in ( T rig . 34) They should b e k ept f ixed
or rigi d in Yoga . (Nrsp . Mandel . Bath i ng o f them may be
abandoned by the h i gher tyre of asc et i c . ( Tu rf ) . By Yoga p rac t ic e s the
l imb s may be made pure as far a s the re sult s of i .a are c onc ern ed
(hund . Woman i s a t rap fo r th e l i mb s,
and bi nd s them . (Ya) . They
should b e u sed in hono ring Rama . (Re map .
Re f erenc e s to the l i mb s of the de i t ii e s are lat e a s a
r ule , though k ena tell s u s that the Vedas are th e l i . b s o f Fra hms ,
and Tai t . in f o rm s u s th at the v"
are hi s mot he r s . Gopi . 5 al so
mak e s the Veda s th e limb s of Brahma . The limb s of Brahma are red and
whit e ( Dhyana . 12 ) Th e hi msel f i s an of the currev e Co d .
ga mma ,
a
%&r . l ) I nd ra wor shi p s wi th T owed limb s . (Bha sm . 2 ) Othe r re fe reni e sikb
i nduc e men to employ tle i r limb s in wor shi p b y showing that the god s di d
51
hi x b a avay'
um
l imb or memb er , i s u se d a few t ime s in the lat e Upani sad s .
They b elong to the b ody . (Yfij . 19 ) That vhich has limb s i s t emp o rary ; that
which has not i s et e rnal . The de i ty i s wi tout limb s . ( Tri p . M . The same
pa s sag e tell s us that av i dy o? or i gnoranc e , as a general p ri nc i ple ha s memb ers
and that in me taphy sic s c ert ai n things have f o rm ,ax fira
,but no t member s ,
avay ava . Al so t he highe st stat e o f the soul i s wi thout part s . I n Tri o . 120
t he word i s used in c onnec ti on wi th the limb s o f th e b o dy,where omen s oc cur
ring in th e ar av a"
a f o ret ell d eath . I n Bi ts d i f f e rent av aya“a are due t o the
mani f e st rower o f the dei t y , and in Narad . 6 b eg . the 25 el ement s t at tvani
o f t he asc et ic are hi s limb s .
53
Th e re c ogni t i on o f f i v e metaphy sic al or she at hs s to the soul
8 a very c oxm t n t h ing . There a re ale s si x mat eri al sheath s mentione d .
They are enu merat ed as fol’
ow s in Hu ig . 3,and Ve ra} 10 . Skin
,f le sh , b loo d ,
b one,sinew
,marrow . mai t rey i sp eak s c f the soul as be ing free f rom
the six
Seven elemen t s or d ” ‘ are ment ione d Bhav . reaogni z e s sev en , but
ment i on s only t he sk i n sp eci f ically . Th ey are enu merate d as f o llow s in
Trig . 5 . Di ge st ive f lui d f “ b loo d,f le sh , f at
,b one
,marrow , semen .
They inc rease When inc rease s . (Varah .
Varah . l . i £ 1-4 ment i on s 24 b elc ng ing t o the bod‘. Th ey are
th e 10 sense s,the 5 r
the f iv e sen se ob j ec t s ( sound &c ) , and the
f our p owe r s c on st i tut ing the that i s , *"
n
Ci rc l e s
Th e 1 or c i rcl e s of the bo dy p lay an impo rtant part in th e
lat e Yoga exerc i se s,though unkown earli er . Ordinarily six of them are
re c ogni z ed, (Varah . and see b elow ) . Th ey are twic e enu merat ed and
loc at ed ; in Yo . Cu . 2, and Ye . hu .
—12 . Thet r e as f ollow s .
anu s heart
pudenda nech
navel f o rehead .
In Hansa 3,though th ey are no t c alle l c t hey are each ent i oned
b? nax e,and af t e r t i e has b een c lo se d
,the b reat s to be drawn up
th rough the remaining r ' in the o rder of th ei r enum erat ion .
The r re f erri ng to the navel regi on , l eans st ou t th e ear s fl ing .
Ai r i s b reatle d int o it . (7ri j . By c an 0 o f rJ,ti e are
c onc e nt rat ed in i t,an ! th i s cu re s d i sea se s o f th e stomabh . ( T rio,
108 ,
n he echo o f the wo rd 0 i s heard in the e r F‘
( Sau bh .
The P r“ i s f our f inger " in si z e
,and c ont ain s th e art ery
i : oflth e le f t and p i ? al on th e ri ght , While "i f .
r
'
i s be twe en them.
t S& U b o The sp ok es c f j t are menti one d,and it i s in one zlac e
sai d t o b e betw e en the ey ebrow s . (Yo . Cu .
s he b ‘
rfic a . r i s one f inge r in s i z e,and c ont ains the ey e of knowl
edge , like a glowing t ongu e of’1ame . ( Sau bh .
I n Saubh . 3,the i s sai d t o be the n i c v z
c c ahra ,th e
Er ur f
t I t i s lik e the Ic int of a nee dle .
The same pa s sage t ell s u s that th e akacec
rk f c contain s a 16 pet al s !
lo tu s .
Even some of the earli e st U pani sad s de sc rib e t hefody as a c i tyeleven
wi th 5 13 1 p o rtal s (Ai t . Katha . The se eleven po rtal s , or
dv: are de f ined in the c ommen tary a s f ollow s . The ear s the eye s ,
th e no se the mouth, th e " two b eIOW ' the navel ( l ) ,
and the su ture in th e skull,th e As th e c i ty i s
Brahma ' s,the se po rt al s are f o r cannanhat ion Wi th the out er worl d . Several
a s sag e s ment ion only nine op enening s . (gvet .Y r ga c . 4; YOGR T . 133
Yo . Ju . 167) I n the Bhagav adg i t i ,nine O p e ni ng s are menti oned . They
are th e sam e a s tho se gi ven above,wi th the omi ddi on o f the la st two
,the
navel and the r l r Narad . 221£ & ment i ons only seven , and
Anna .f i v e
,b u t t h e la c t pa s s age re fe rs to the sense s .
I n Ai t . the opening in the sku ll i s that hy Which the soul
The ba mb ono i s mentioned as part o r t he m ay . (Anna. 1) That o f
th e embryqdeve lope s in the f i f th month . (Garbha
Breast
The b reas t or che st,
i s sai d t o b e move d by th e b reath, and 3
th e n sound i s ut t ered . (Mai t .
I n Yoga the breast i s t o b e somewhat elevat ed . ( Ksu ri . Ai r i s
to b e draw n into i t f rom the nec k,and f rom the b reast t o the navel .
(gri j .
I t i s t he al t ar of the Vai sel f . ( Ch . I t i s the
al tar when the bo dy i s vie e dha sac ri f i c e . (Ma han .
o f“ i c f the b o dy of th e c o smi c al puruss i s the earth ,
Btkt o
i s ment i oned only in very lat e Upani sa d s . The t A ir : or
i s to be put on i t . (Kalag . l; Jabali ) . Thi s t il ” f ree s one f rom
sin s c ommi t t ed by the mi nd . (Brha j . 223 1 Yajnavalkhya t ell s hing
Janala to put asle s on hi s b reast . (Brha j . In Yég a the b reath i s
to b e s t e p p e d i n the b reast . (Yo Cu . The ai t i s sai d t o ri se f rom
{x
the b reast in yOga b reathings . (Yo . Ku .J egfl
fiw m t ) “M N
J ‘
ALN W M a ) ” M U fM lo b
Pre s sing to the b reast as a si gn of af f e ct ion i s menti oned in
T ri p . M .
i s u se d on c e . The t of Ku rukse t ra i s sei i t o he
in it . (QrI j .
a man tra for th e w e l fare o f the zhild . (Erh . Rama to o } Bi tfi on
h i s af t er c onque ring Ravana . (Rama p . Nature i s al so borne on
hi s an Tno moon i s called ; r
j ff‘
( having a hare sea ted o n her h ip ) .
(Harad . 9 . end ) .
The f lank , p ” “v: i s one o f the part s o f hhe ext ernal bo dy . (Ktm3 . l )
I t i s a mong the part s of the b o dy to rec eive th e t i lr kc, (Brha j .
whic h i s t o b e pu t on with naz c. e t o th e two i 3' s or to Giza . (Brha j .
4he t i la : a i s t o b e put on the flankh by Brahman s and Keat riy as ,
but no t by Va i cyas . (Bghai . The t i ? - and a she s so app li e d f ree one
f rom the sin of embrac ing ano the r ' s wi f e . (t a j . Conc ent rat ing th e
Eat t ent ion in the f lank s give s one krowle dge of”
i rr*
c :r . (gand .
From the f lank s of the C reato r came th e sun and moon . (Brha j .
When th e r .h:3 a r i i s drawn the sun and moon are put at it s f lank s , (Nrsp .
The sun i s at the right f lank of Ru dra ,and Uma at the l e f t . (Ramarah.
Th e all- sup ply ing c owh ’
n u stan d s at the f lank of Varada .
(Varadap .
$RI Cc s . i c ' l. The f lank s of th e sac ri f i c ial ho r se are the di rec t ion s .
(Brn . Tno se o f death are the no rt h and south . (Brh . Tho se
o f the c o smic al b i rd are t ime and f i re . (Hahsa . 6 ) The side s of Prajapati
Pa .
.i s rather a wing
, or si de in th e sense o f di rec t ion than a
part of th e human bo dy . Bu t the pa“; of the variou s r
“or t
whic h are in si de o f one anoth er l ik e Shi ne s b oxe s are re f erred to and
i de nt i f i ed Wi th t h e b reath,the Ve das
, do ,in Tai t . 2 . Tho se of the th ree
sac ri f ic ial f i re s are ment i oned in Mai t The a o f th e
""T“a are hi s pl ea su re s . (Ava dh .
the are o f f ered wi th in th e sam-‘way . ( Malt .f
. 26 ) . The
f i re of th e i s i dent i f i ed wi th the G“
‘ f i ro . ( Ga rbha In
another pas sage , th e'
here ap parently the t runk ) o f Brahma i s the
ya j ur Ve da . ( Kau s. Brahma i s sai l to b e in the (Gau d .
I n Yo ga t he o rdi nary f i re s o f the b ody are to b e c onc ent rat ed in
the f i re o f the b elly . (Krun. 2 ) . Again,i t s f i re i s to b e mingle d wi th the
out e r f i re . ( Qri j . But th e mo s t f requent ment ion of th e b elly in the
lat er Upani sad s i s the f i l ling o f i t wi th ai r , hol ding air in i t , an i
b reathing th e air all out of i t . ( (gagg. Yo . Ku . Q ri j . Q )
( Triq . ll4 ) A b reath i s loc at ed b ehind i t and a bond in it . (Yo . Cu . 49 )
I t i s to he h eld ri gi d in th e 1’
i c o n :r . (Yo . hu . 1.3 2 ) . A ro sary of
i s pu t on it with a pro p e r mant ra . (Huaral . The le f t
( f o o t or arm?) i s t o b e put on i t in s c ertai n (Yo . hu .
I t i s t o b e used as a b eggi ng ve s sel by the yogi n,the only o th e r one
al lowe d him b e ing the hand ~ ~ re fe rring to the f ac t that the higher c las se s
of asc et ic s mu st b e ab solut ely wi thout th i s wo rld ' s goo d s . (Irun. 5;
Jabala 6 ; Ya) . b eg . ) fine may c ommi t sin s wi th the b elly (Mahan .
henc e the ”r . u : should c are f ully guard hi s . ( Narad .
The u . of the 21 wo rl d germ c ontain s al l living things . ( Kathar .
That of Ganapt i i s long . ( Cane ) .
Co smic al . Th e b elly o f the sac ri f i c ial ho r se , as well as that of
the co s mic al man,Urtyu ,
i s i den ti f i ed with the atmo spheric realm
(5 2h . That of the deit y i s the sea . (Vara dot .
The r. of the fo e tu s develop e s in the f ourth month . ( Garbha
I t s f i re i s mentioned . (75nd. Qri j . Otherwi se the re f e renc e
i s to that of the dei ty,whi z] i s sai i to pe rvade the sky , and t o c o ntain ,
and men (Vara iot ,3,
The f i r st ment ion o f the navel i n in the old Ai t s reya Upani sad ,
where it i s c onnec t ed wi th whi ch i s fiffifi to have ) omo f o rth
f rcm the nave l o f the p rimal men ,while f rom t } i s i n turn cam e death .
I n re turn , death , b ec oming ent er s the navel . (Ai t . Then
w i t } the exc ep ti on o f a few un ir portnnt re f e renc e s in Mhdn . ,the mention
of the nav el i s c on f ine d t o the lat e and very lat e Upani sad s .
I t i s b elow the hear t . ( Mahan . I t i s a. par t of the ext e rnal
bo dy= (I tmfi l It i s in th e c ent er o f the bo dy , and c ontain s a twelve
sp ok ed whee l . (83nd. Trio . Thi s undoub d te ily re f e rs to the
ap p earanc e of the nave l,whi le the s ta tanent a s to i t s loc ati on i s o f
c o ur se app roxima t el y co rrec t . I t i s one of the 18 vi t al spo t s in Yoga .
( Tri g . 1228 ; 85nd. I n one passage the i s sai d to b e loaa t e d
two f i nger s be low the navel ( Qri j . Thi s would se em to b e a mi st ake
for the as th e i s u sually loc ate d above th e navel . ( ( Qfind.
5; Yo . Cu . 14 ) Th e t in thi s regi on i s th e
(Yo . Cu . 13 ; Yo . Eu . o r the (Yo . Cu . 8 ) In i t sfioc ali tyi s f ound the f oo d- po rt i on of t he bo dy . ( Trig . 6 ) Thi s no doubt c onnec t s
thi s part of t he b o dy wi th d ige sti on . It s c i rc le i s in the mi ist o f a web
O f art eri e s . (Varah . 5 who di g e st ive f i ro dw ell s in the
As se en in the f i r st re f erenc e given
ab ove (Ai t . some c onnec t i on between breath and th e navel wa s c on ceived
from the earli e st t ime s . Thi s c onnec t ion i s inc reasingly emphasi z ed , thrug i
the mot ive i s not so much a sc ient i f ic de sc r i p ti on of the brdy , but a
ma ni p ulat i on o f the b reath in Yoga exer c i se s . A b reath i s loc at ed above
i t . ( Yo . Cu . 49 ) Opinion s vary as to j u st whi ~hbne of the ai r s i s l:oc ated
in the navel . Tri g . 138 in fo r ms u s that f rom th e no se to the navel i s an
ai r spac e in the b o dy . B ut the same Upah i sad in f o rms u s that i s in
the navel,as do o ther s al so . ( Trio. 78 ; gri j . 4 .
° f ; gand . I t i s s l ab
sai d to con 's in the ( g
r i j . and the navel i s even c a‘le d
a o r t r e e ? i n l i l ell Fro:‘1 1 v 1 0 t h or w: c
'.10 I l.
( Pu l u i o I t i 116 ( f tle six 3 1i of part o f tlo i i H u r ) i n h f
h e
)z'
in‘t . u nli n rah . 8 .
I t s 12 sp O h ec er tai n Vi gru n i ot
‘e 1 ce s u . ( T rig . u u
,50)
"i chu i . s li r seat i n t
‘e navel
,l ike a f l x f lower . tDi1
'
n ll ) Ir stead
o f ti e i'
gure f ti e vleel,
i t i s sai d to have a ten pe tal ed lot s in i t .
(Yo . Cu . 1) Th e f of the word 0 i s g lac e d a s Prahna i n ti e navel . ( Ir u . T ,
0 i s the navel o’
c re a tn e s . (Phas e. 9 )
De i t i e s k r sna an t L ah smi ar e sa i d t o have lotu slik e nav el s .
kGolalal . Sant h . l ) All ti euod s c s. e
” o rth f rom th e navel tlo Jreato r.
{P .ha j . The 1 i t ; i s ti e navel o f thaha n. In th e n ve l
Tha t of Vi ra da i s dee p . ( " ara d i r.
or c ent er o f the h? “ l
] . Bra hma. Vi snu an i Anh e ga are plac e d .
i i i i s the navel e’
.
‘e c o s . ic e l b i r i . Th e region of mi dai r wa s
bo rn f rom th ' navel o’Pu ru sa . ( P . S . The c o s. i 3 .l elat i o n of t i e
t i eatl s and the navel has b e e n ment i one i a t ti e l e gi nni r g o‘ tli s sec t r r
.
S i ahm a,wi
e{ re duc ed from th e n a v e ? r f ti e dei t g . (T aradot . 3‘
L i n e‘ i s e tYe atmo c n e ri : re g i on e r d sfac e x c re sc y ro‘u : d . e re ’
c t .
in th e last re f erenc e i s u se d .
S C u - t l m 0 3 s 1p e ar s f o r the an us ,tu t on one osc as i on se w e to
b e u sed fox .h£ nav el . The hand r are t o i s f ol d ed b etween t he Iu denda an d
s
i s an o ther word u sed throughout the ent i 9 range of brar i su d
li t e rat re,but wi th an Lnore si L nc e f
r r tl r l g i ou s st nl,i t t .
T t s a 8.0 0 13 1 f un s t
' on L s evacu at iox , and i t i s sa*
’0 the ti e onl_ si t e o f
- the g ort al of th e b elly i s me nti oned but onc e . I t may
Po s sibly be the navel , but i s a c re li b ely the anus . A trhobb inr in i t
f o re t ell s death in 10 day s . ( Tri ‘. 125 )
i s c as e used ror the anus , when the mi db ody i s sai d to be two
finb er s above i t . ( T rig ,f 5 ) $4/ Q J V D U ‘A ,th1_
.Q ¥- ; A‘
5‘
0p o@5 11 4&g
Hi dbo dy .
Tne mi db o dy,do? a s sumns impo rtanc e in the very lat e Yo
ga
Urani sads . It i s somet ime s di f f ic ul t t o t ell whether the wo rd really mean s
i s u sed as a name for a srec i fi c p art of th e b o dy, or merely indic at e s
gene rally some c ent ral spo t . But some pas sage s Which are c l early u se i with
the f o rc e of 1ro p er na me are as foll%s . The mi db o dy i s a vi tal spo t in Yoga .
( T ri s
. 130 ) I t i s two f inger s above th e anu s and two b elow the p eni s .
(Varah . From it t o the lo in s i s the f i re part of the bo dy . ( T rig . 137)
05nd. would seem t o imply that it i s the sa me as the c, 1
71
Ti e hau l an l i t n D art s .
T he rm s t c om n e n wo r d ' e r he e l i s A gene ral te s c r‘rfi’
on o'
the lead , though a fanc i ful one,i s
give n in Sch . Whores it i s sai i
t o re sex b le an inver t e d sons cup,the mouth c orre srond inb t that c f the
sox a ve s sel . On the margin o f thi s ve s sel si t th e seven w i th as
the e i L L th . Thi s i s ex plained t o mean the e ight T he head has f our
sec t i cns or suture s, a nd 16 t oo th c avi ti e s . (Garbha 5 ) The hea i o f th e
f o etu s d evelop e s i n the second s outh . (Garbha 3 ) I t i s use d i n the c arry in,
of b urden s,as indic at e d by the when th e s tudent c arri e s f i re a i
hi s head for hi s t each e r . (Nund.3
. 2 . 10 ) It i s a part of the bo dy , bo rn to
d i e . (Ktmfi 1) Ve ry lat e i s the stat ement tha t i s sub j ec t to di sease s c au san
by the y a s sag e of ai r . (Yo . Cu . I t i s thought by some that the r
re si d e s in th e head (Mandel . 7. 4) . The deit y dwells in every head . ( 3vet .
t i s prot ec t e d by lrobably re f erring t o the f unc t i on o f breath.
(gi ras . 3 )- 1 i i i t . One honors the de ity wi th th e he ad . 8 )
Rudra y rot ec t s one all the way f rom the regi on of the head . ( Q i ra s 6 ) In
t he fou rt tt of several way s o f re f lec t ing on th e p o int in th e wo rd o ~ th e
head t roub le s . (Hansa 10) The p eni t ent sa nnyasin has an nan: even or
ros c oi ul one . (flaiv .4 ) I t i s t o b e held even or rigi d in Y oga . ( 9554. 1
01
QrIJ . 3; 5 . Yo . nu . VarEh . Thi s i s e spec ially t rue in th e
p eaf owl sun; lo st ure of the yogin . ( 9554. Trig . In one plac e i t
i s t o b e hel d twi st ed in Yoga . ( Trig . 9 2 ) I t i s to b e c overe d in one for; o f
(Bu dreh . l )Ycoa ( Y o . hu o Salutation i s ma de t i th i t .
h( 8hasne . 1) I t 1 8 one o f
th e t en po int s on Wh ich the mind i s to be c onc entaat e d i n Yoga . (Rimi rah .
Th e y ogin who gaz e s 12 f ingers above hi s head , f ixe dly , b ec ome s
i u u u rt al . (Advay ) I n thi s spot, 12 f inger s ab ov e the he ad , t i e rs i s a l i ght
which gee s to im mo rtal it y . (Mande l . 2 ) In thi s c onnec tion , i t i s sai d
that ax n'
when one lo ok s f ixedly at the sun ,a sec ond sun se ems t o s prear
in the spa c e in the head . (Advay ) . Th e foo t of Rama i s to b e on the he ad
of hi s wor shi pp er s . (Pima rah . The se wo r shi p p er: are to ado rn the ir .h
B -l q
Purs es has a thou sand head s . ( P . 8 . 1; fi c f . Hahan . 3; lL J
Bha sma a) . nu dg ala ,whi ch i s a c omment ary t n a part o f t he Pu ru sa sfikta ,
inf o rms u s in that the ex p re s si on a thou san d" i s here meant t o
ex p re ss the i dea o f in f ini t y o f head s . h u n ch-T ri p . 3 . 2 al so as sure s u s
that th e dei t y has inf i ni t e head s . Al so Varadot . 3
7:r:ere the i n f ini t e
h ead s o f the d e i t y are sai d t o p e rvade thc sky . Hahfin . say s that the
d e i t y has two head s , whi le th e lat e Qaunahiya c redi t s 0 wi th the same
nu mb e r , that i s r and (Oaun . 3 ) Death i s sai d t o have had thre e
h ead s . ( S ub . 1) In ano ther lat e pa s sag e , th e dei t y , though wi t hout a h ead ,
ha s h ead s in all di rec t i on s . ( Bha sma
The head o f Puruss i s hi"
(Brh . Hi s head i s al so ment i one d
in T ai t . The head o f Pra japat i i s r '
. (wai t . Brahmfi i s t he hea d
o f the dei t y . (Mahan. 35 ) That o f Brahma i s”
E"
. (Kane. L at er U psh i
sad s carry on th i s t y p e o f thought . Th e h ead o f Rud ra li e s t oward the
no rth . ( gi ras . 3 ) That o f Atharvan i s th e divi ne rec e pt acl e or sac ri f i c ial
v e s sel . ( Ci ras 6 ) Th e h ead o f the dei t y , o r Hayag riva ,i s that o f a ;; reat
ho r se , (Hay s . 2 ; T ri p . M . wh i ch seem s t o go ba c k t o Brh .
whe re Dadhy ac the Atharvan sp ok e f rom the head o f a ho r se .
w ~ ~1 . The head o f death i s th e ea st , whi le that o f the a
i s the dawn . ( Emh . The se two ar e in ac co rd , bu t <i i s
ag re e wi th the ment i on mad e o f Ru d ra ' s head abov e . Th e sky i s sai d to have
rolle d out f rom the head o f Puru sa . ( P . S . 14 ) Varadot . 3 al so sp eak s o f
the sky a s havi ng b e en p ro duc ed f rom th e head o f the dei t y .
Ado rat i o n i s pai d t o th e head in t he soc alled
ver se (hrs p . and th e Raha sya Upani sad i s said t o b e th e head o f
al l U L ani sad s , a s th e Upani sad s are o f the Yeda s .
The vari ant f ound in Erha j . ind ic at e s a part o f theb o dy to rec eive th e
C rown o f
of th e de i t y o r o f the my st ical t I t 1 8 one o f the part s o f t he bo dy
whe re the f our f oo t e d Frahman app ear s . (Brahma~2 ) Sury a agni dwell s in .
( Prah ag . 2 ) break s in t o i t,o r g o e s through i t s door . (Brahmavi d . 12;
Ktmab . I t s p o int i s in eve ry ( Krsna )
In the ol de st U pani sa d s the re are nume rou s warni ng s tha t the h ead
o f p re sumpt ive o r i gno rant p ri e s t s nay bur st o r f al l o f f . YEjnava t ya
threatens di al a i th thi s puni shment of he f ai l s t o an swer hi s que sti on s .
(Erh . $7133) 1 b ebznu ght on b y an inc o rrec t de sc ri p t i on o f
(Ch . Ge ne ral warning s alc ng thi s l ine,a s t o th e dang er o f p rai sing
the dei t y w i thout kneweldg e o f him ,o r o f th e i g no rant u se o f t he n .
are t o b e f ound in Ch .- 9 ;
c rown o f th eRud ra at t end s o n the/head . ( q1ra s 6 ) From the nec k t o th e c rown o f
the head 1 8 giva' s p1ac e . (VarEh . I t i s the part o f the bo dy c o rre
lat e d wi th ( Q ri 3 .
‘ r i c . I n Yoga the b reath i s drawn up to the t o p o f th e h ead .
In some Yoga p rac t i c e s even th e f
i s t o b e drawn u p t o i t . (Yo . Cu . 107) Me di tat ion i s t o b e carri e d on in
i t . ( Trig . 19 ) Thi s c onc ent rat i on in the head g ive s o ne knowl e dg e o f the
Ex kax s Brahma and c i wo rl d s . ( qand. I t i s mad e t o b ear t he
(Brha j . Kalag . 1) I t i s t o b e du st e d a i th ash e s . ( Brha j .
Bha sma . 1) A ro sary o f r “ i s t o b e wo rn on the L t*
"
( ErhaJ .
c on si st ing o f 104 f rui t s . ( Bhasma . 2 ) At the t ime o f wo r sh i p tax-x x
f l ower s are to b e put on it . (Varadot . 6 ) I t i s one o f the 18 vi tal spo t s
in Yoga . (Candd 21 19 ) The ol de s t ment i on o f any such u se o f the head i s
wh en th e dy ing f athe r st rok e s th e h ead o f hi s son and ut t e r s a charm t o
g ive him long l i f e . (Kau s .
W The t o p o f th e h ead i s the sc um. v e s sel in th e f igu rative
b o dy sac ri f ic e . ( Prahag . 4; c f . Erh . Th e sp i ri t o f the sun i s
the h ead o f all b eing s . (Erh .
The
I t 1 8 one o f the pa rt s to rec ei ve th e t ( Harad .
It i s to b e c lean se d by p ro p e r b reath ing . (Yo , Ku . 15 nd.
Sut ure
The ex i t s o pen th e ; , or suture o f the skull an d ent er s the
bo dy . Th i s suture i s al so c alle d f rom t o sp li t o pen. Thi s
pa s sag e , c oming f rom one o f the earlie st ani sad s ,sugg e st s that t he
s pec udat or may have had a skull b e f o re hi m, and soug ht t o ac c ount f o r th e
suture plainly vi si bl e . I t i s no t ewo rthy,t o o
,that th e p re senc e o f th e
f o ntanell e s in th e skul l o f the i n f ant furni she s ex c ell ent g round s f o r th e
sp eculat ion that th e soul mad e an O p ening he re and ent e re d,But a care ful
inve st i gat i c n o f the skull o r o f the part s o f th e bo dy i s not in harmony
Wi th lat er me thod s eiShaw“ M e tiw
Junc t i on of Suture s .
are the name s g iven t o th e
j unc tio n o f the doronal and sag i t t al suture s,re f erre d t o above a s the
spo t th rough whi ch the soul ent e r s and de par t s . The se name s are no t f oun d
in the early Rxx i saia U pan i sad s . But a s the o peni ng o r do o r o f Brahma , a s
t he name i ndi c at e s,it i s o f muc h impo rt anc e ,
e sp e c ially in Y o ga . Th e
i s sai d t o b e in the c rown o f the head,and the art e ry
e 1' run s t o i t . (gags. Uri ] . Vardh . The
c o nnec t s i t wi th the o r regi on abou t the anus . (Mandel . 2;
Advay . ) Along thi s channel the dei t y pa s se s . ( T ri pura In the f i f th
stat e the sup reme Brahma i s sai d to b e in i t . ( Trig . 150 )
Th e spi ri t o f the sup reme de i t y over shadow s i t in t ime o f deep sl ee p .
( he re b e
(Yo . cu . At the t ime o f Yoga a gr eat l i gh t
ent e r s i t . ( T rig . 6 3 . 6 4 ) " he 1'
i s c onnec t e d wi th it . (Yr. Yu .
The soul should l eave b y i t at death,as above . ( T ri p . M . As the
f i r st appe ar s in the rathe r ol d Mahdnfiraya na Upa n isad , wh ere
w e are to l d that th e hea t f rom the heart war ms the body f rom the
so le o f the f o o t t o th e f o rehead . (hahan .T he u se o f th e wo rd h ere
p lainly im pge s the ; art o f t he bo d y mo st remo t e f rom th e f eet,and s o
migh t be the c rown o f th e head rath er than the f o rehead . It woul d se em
t o mean the f o reward part o f th e c rown .
The wo rd , o r rat he r i t s mo re u su sal f o rm a t t s bec ome s mo re
c ommon in the lat e Upani sad s . The a’
h'
— 3 a _ o i s lo cat e d in the ma st 1 .
(Yo . Ru . The g reat art e r y s'
s“ n’
g o e s t o itx . ggei j .
p ‘ li f-i i s . As a measure o f the limi t o f the bo dy,i t i s u sed , as
in the f i r st re f er enc e g i ven , t o no t e that even t o th e 1 ‘ s. u . a the b o dy
5i s b enefit e d in Y og a . ( Yo . Cu . 56 ) The Sc ri p ture s are to be it c re d. i n i t,
ind i c at i ng that some t ime s at lea st mental ac t i v i t i e s were c onc e ived o f a s
b e ing c arri ed on in the head . ( Ay ad h . 25 ) In one f o rm o f Yog a i t i s t o i s
rubb e d . (Yo . Ku . The bo dy i s t o b e f il le d wi th a ir f rom t he sale o f
the f eet t o th e s t a‘
a . (gri j . The C“? 353“
i s to b e employ e d on
thi s part o f the head . ( Saubh . b e g . ) Ag ain ,a she s are t o b e du st e d on las
th e bo dy f rom th e so le o f the f o o t t o th e (Brha j .
Ashe s we re put on th e h ead o f t he god Hari to puri f y him . ( Erha j .
I . 1 8 o ne o f the f i v e part " o f t he bo dy t o rec ei ve the t il "
: so that in
th i s c a se the f o rehead se ems t o b e meant , it b eing th e mo st c on spi cuo u s
pla c e t o rec e ive th e t i l la . (Brha j . The fi r s tclr o f the as c et ic
s houl d no t be woun de d in any way . ( Narad . 4, end ) .
l c lfita
i s u se d only in th e lat e and ve ry lat e Upan i sad s’,
enrii t s
u se i s n early alway s i n some ri tuali st ic o r r' lig i e u s sen se . I t i s csne
o f the part s o f the bo dy bo rn to di e . (Ktma In one pas sag e i t se em s
t o in31u de the spo t between th e ey eb rows an d th e base o f th e no se ,C3 hy § n.
73 ) wh il e ano ther in dic at e s that i t i s se parat e f rom them . (Nada . 4) . Th e
81
alre ars O H JO f o r t he f o rehead . qmva wear s a t on h i s
( Shaman 1)
Th e Fac e .
T he wo rd i s late in i t s u se,th e o l de st ment io n b e ing fit 7ve t .
The art e ry g o e s to th e f ac e . (Yo . Cu . 20) Cv e t . t ell a ta that
th e dei t y , Phagavan , li ve s in eve ry f ac e . C e rt ain wo r shi ppe r s o f th e de it y
hav e Rudra- l i ke f ac e s . (Bha sma . 2 ) Thi s f o llow s a pa s sag e whe re i a i s
sai d to have a m ai l ing f a c e . (Bha sma . l ) The si x fac e d de i t y , ( Kart ike ya)
rev eal s knowle dg e . (Jabali )
al so i s u se d only in th e lat e Upani sad s . Th e art e ry “h
run s t o i t and c onvey s a i r to it . (Varah . Yo . Ku . Bu“
o r th e f unc t io n o f p re sentat ive knowle dg e , i s locat e d in i t . ( Carir . )
Th e1 ent e r s many f ac e s . ( T rig . 153 )
The"
l . i s employ e d on th e f a c e . ( Saubh . b e g . A pl eas ing
f ac e may b e ob tai ne d by bh e i a - f i lli ng the who l e b o dy wi th ai r li k e
a j ar . (75nd.
Rama , a s r r ha s a hap py f ac e . (HEmap . 26 ) hi s f ac e i s et a
plea sing a s honey . ( Tri p . M . That o f Varada al so i s p lea sant .
(Vara dap . That o f Nrsihha i s t e rrib le . ( T ri p . M .
p ro p e rly means mx ikx mouth ,b u t i s twi c e ment ione d as ons e f
th e plac e s to re c e i v e th e St‘ e r re'
e rens s
t o the wo rd w ill b e f ound un de r "mc u th" .
i s a no th e r wo r i o f a mb igu ou s mean ing . I t i s t o rec e ive th e
t l a nd mu s t mean mean- fa i e her ( Ge ri . Fo r o thers la s sage s seeunder mouth .
An d th i s , h te ll s u s,i s t‘e rense w)
,thi s slo t
‘
s Z onor d .
ale 1 c t e v
“s nare s r
to 0 1618 6 1 t o i 0 In 0 ) o L $o J U O ‘J
re fl ec t i on Tr il n a a, [ ear s i “ t } c av i t
,t e tv e n th e _e
‘r v s -h
0
I t i s the o ; en'
.g f o r tr a sc erd ing
splon iori
g
re i s u sed f o r th e o,n i n
g.
T he lu ,i1° o f tl e e
,e s are to he turned h
e tween ha the e , etr o s
‘
nYo . n u . Yo . 3u . £ 2 ; N ah .
Yo g a con~en trat l Cns n a y s a t’ ero th , im a
ge o f the u on .
x § zhé~ Th e .n i s t o be L el’
tk er in a ’o rm . o ’
You ( )a .
. h e salvr t i on M i ch na Ob » ins ti rongl t
’
e u s o f 11 3 slo t 1 f e rr i e s
I t i s t o h e l el 1s _l
flvh1 . elevat 1 i n Yoga . ( } 3 ai . I t i t o
L e rat t e d in”
t ru e o f logs . ( Yo . n u .
T he t l: s t o be c rn
here . ( s il lg . 1; vass . ; Th e l i ne : o f th e
b ll arfl. o be drai n t o t he
h““f . ( Jabal i ) O f c o xrse ai r 1 ° t o hreatled i nt o th i s spot in l hefid there .
A nd i t 1 8 a g art o f the bo dy rele t e i natu rally t o the
01 s ent ai r . (gri ) .
r IL the fore t e a i,t e t ween th e e ae Ws of ti e c o su i c i l h i rd
i s the loc ali t y o f 5 -1(151i . 4)
“yeli d s
The ey eli d s , are to b e c losel in a f o rm o f Yoga . 3 )
” ear s dro p down Fo rm th ea . ,u f
’
(hue h .
Etrelal o
a, ,
ear s i n‘
u t a s i n g l e pa s sa g e . B: the lowe r e,e1a sl a n :
the eart l c l i n one, nd 1
,t‘
r ulp e r one t‘
e . \ r . ( Irn .
T i - s _ s a so rt f . 1st cal le s sauf e
’. rin
gl z ~ ti c h i f ‘
e i t e s s t L u
o .ba h s o f the h ead .
8 5
i s al so emxha s i z e d . It i s a lhnb o f (Knu s. w i thou t n
o ne c an no t see f o r ms,and by it one a s t end s t o ( hams.
In thi s c onnec t ion , one shoul i res emb e r the i d en t i f icat i on o f in t ell ec t
wi th the Sup reme gp i ri t ,set f o rth mo st c learly in one o f th e f our g reat
s ent enc e s,
Further t each ing ,mainly f rom the ol de r Upan i sad s , in regard t o i t s
relat ion t o th e ex t e ri o r wo rl d,i s that th e ey e i s the or su p po rt e r
o f thing s . (Ch . Erh . Thi s i s c o nnec t e d w i th the i dea that al l
f o rm s e x i st in i t . I t i s the t rue,o r Mai t . A late
Upani sad mak e s 3 the think ing o rgan ,subo rdi nat e t o the e y e ,
an d
ey e that they are uni t e d in Yo g a . (Advay . )
The ey e i s no t e s sent ial t o li f e
,a s wa s demon st rat e d in the quarrel
o f th e se n se s . ( Oh . Kau s. One may l i ve w i th out it ,
‘u t
would be blind . ( Kau s. I t do e s no t sup p o rt th e b o dy . ( Fran .
One c an no t tak e f o o d wi th it . (Ait .
Th e ol d Upan i sad s male much o f the re lat i on o f the ey e to the r
In the quar rel o f the s en se s,re f e rre d t o above
,th e eye had t o ac knowl e dg e
i t s inf er i o ri t y t o r r‘
.a . ( Gh . x kx Kau s. I t st an d s b ec au se
r“ do e s . (Erh . I t i s sat i sf i e d whe n p
r xna i s . (Ch .
I t i s c ompo se d o f ts and
“
awhi ch go t o the ear and to p r 3 at the
death o f the ey e . ( hau s . Th e b o iy o f r in
dwell s in thaey e . (P ra ‘.
It i s dep endent ( n and ac c omrani e s Tn f o r when rr”
r l eave s th e
b o dy , so do e s th e ey e and the o the r sen se s . ( Pra ; . the su
rrelp s th e
ey e in ( Pra; . O f the vi tal ai r s o f ti e bo dy,
“r i t sel f i s
in the ey e . ( Pra q . In de e p slfiep th e ey e t ak e s all i t s f e rn s anda o
re t i re s to Or,i t at ta in s the Sup reme g {
i ri t in
de e ; sle e p . ( Prac. ‘h early pa s sage t ell s u s that th e e y e i s d rawn
in during sle e l . (Brh .
The soul may de part f rom th e ey e at death . (R rh . Ve ry c lo sb ly
c onnec t e d wi t } th i s i s ti e io c t~
ine that ar { rt e rv c r . e s f rom th e hear t and
O ne o f them i s tle c o s mical yu ru sa i de a . The sunPs the o,s or the
Ch . o r o f Pra j fipn ti . ( uni t . 6 . 1f ) T he ey e i s sai d to b e th e
f ou rth f o o t o f rrahma ,and t o si ine wi th the sun
, Kdi tya ,a s i t s liL } t .
(Ch . The ey e i s the di v in i t y o f the sun s p i ri t . (Erh . The
ey e i s the sun, (Erh . o r tle sun th y e . (hahfin . 14 ) Ab ain ,
xkax
Idi t ya i s sa id to t o have sp rung f rcm the The dei t y c arri e d away the
p risa l ey e b ey on d d eath,and i t b e en e the sun . (Erh . The s un c ame
Ve ry lat e i s the st at ement the t Surya wa s ho rn from \Sub . l )f ron the ey e . (Ai t . An d a lat e U pani sa d i nf o r ms u s that th e sun was
bo rn f rom th e ey e o f the de i t y . (Va r adot . 3 ) Th e sun dei t y i s ey e ,and
y o s se s se s ey e . ( Surya ) The sun po s se s se s ey e . (Ah si ) Go lng bac h,to the ol d
Ulani sad s , the sun i s the ey e o f the (Erh . The s un an d h x c n
are th e e ye s o f Brahma . {Hun} . Th e sun an d moon de pen d on the ey e .
( Sh .The sun i s in the e y e o f man , (Brh . i t i s th e sp i ri t
in t i e help s th e ey e in
1
( Prog . At deat i,the
ey eLoe s t o Ed i tya . (Erh . 1) The relat i on o f the sun t o sight , in
that i t sup p li e s the llbht nec e s sary f o r that func t i on , i s a ve ry su f f ic i ent
re a son f or the c onne c t i e r h ere e st abl i she d , and i t i s su rp ri si ng that i t
AM A M
ha s no t heenhh ark e d in Indo— Euro p ean inve st i gat i on . Th e re seem s to b e
flsome
pri mi tve c onne c t io n b etwe en moon and h ind .
“éJ JJ
t h i s se ems t o he a p re p e r pla c e f o r ment ioning the ver se so o f t en
r e y aea tod i n the Urani sa i s . R .V . A . V .
" Th e Suri s ever behol d the h i ghe st st at i on o f Vi snu ,
“te e t zhe d out lik e in ey e in the shy ."
hh i le the ver se o r Ci nally re fe rre i to the z en i th lo s t i tion o f th e sun ,
th e lat e Uxan i ga i s , w‘
i 3h Lu ot e ti le ras age ,mak e i t r w
’er to ti e su rrex e
sta teo f Vi snu a s th e chi e f o i . \Kru hs y a 5; hg ar. Gorilop . l; Vasu .
U
Sh an da 15; huh t i . Varah . 5 . er i ; T ’ ro a ° ra OH T: Tr i‘u ra 4)
uh e j t Wh o c . iuin ll ; xe rfe e t, e e in c h i ' t r .t J e "
rt v c rlinurc ti in
hu t b c e
’
c the t o iy ,
hu t U ' ' e“er e r f ev il cau se } i t tr wo rn in
th e i r int ere st al s o .
O ther ma t t e r i s ad de d 1: lat er L reni ea de . A d i vi ne e ye we,t o obta
’
h e’
h: . e fle 3 t i ng on th e pc in t in th e we r i o' in the n i nth . way . cnsa 10)
n nOV le dg e i e the eg o 0’
some . (Va ) : Cne who ha s su z} an ey e see s bo th
a l l t x eb e d s an d st at i one r; thi ng s . ghu nt z i . 16 } The e ge s are nr thin
u
t u t
ff 3 s tu ’y i n; the ; i r. sn Wp ani ea l one zwr ifi e s th e »y
e
s v en “i t e r at i on s . Whilr thi s . ny n ean than one ' s de sofln iant sx f o r s even
g enerat i on s woul d b * bl e s sed wi th rnr e ey e s,i t i s mo:e in a z t or i wi th ti e
‘bL
C 0 r 1ene ral t rend of i nd i an thought e e eu1yo se that the p er s‘n W i ll h i msel l h ave
lu re e ; e e duri ng seven re bi rth s . Abain ,hy t e ach ing lOO Brahr en e ti e h ent ra
in th e Cu ru ge Urani ga i , one f re e s h imsel’ f rom the ey e c F the snak e . gear h;a
“nov le dge an d i
gno ranc e are th e ey e s o f bin ding an d rel ea se c nmna mc ls
"
Q
( n i hi v . ) L I OWle oue end ignorans e are l i k e n e d t o ey e s .
1 -e n wa s c re at e l by“reh rn { f or th e Lli r l scun i in on . ( G . I .
Ir t he f i gurati ve bo dy sac ri f ic e , the e y e i s the i lhvarvv g ri e s t .
fift h . g ah lh .f 4zl ) In ano th e r f igurat i v
‘
sa‘ri fi ze ,
i t 1 8 the
f“( 3h . I x: .. m the r J a s eage it i s sa i d to
cnta i t i e sac r i f i c ial bu t te r . 4) The ey e i s sai d t o he 2 euri or t
lho
sin s . \Oh . Thi s 1 5 a pa s sag e ex alt lnt the SSH»Ve i e ,
'
n 1 unh inb
th ep oth er Vale s suhord ine t e t o it
,a s the o rb an s are t o th e soul o r sel f ,
wi l sl ti e SZnu h e x e 1rr son i f i e s . Ao ea t i i r g t o tne Madh; a. 1:h e
rec enS i or o f
J
Frh .,
t he wo rl e o f V ini ng . i s za , gu . (“r . 9 — L 2 }
‘
e R elat i vely , t i e u se o f the ey e in rel iL one o r sno ru nent al
” 3 3 8 ,i s no t b res t . The ey e i s wor shi pre d o r ment i one l in a lo c se we ; ir
o-A J lt l U-S ’C
. 3 . z; 73)
a t es . 1; 6 ” T bs t C O bt u lh
love r wealt } Th e d, in: f ather ,7, a n .n t . e ,
‘r; ne fe . e Z i e t o hi s
5° (e u M S “s ing i t s wor eh-1 li‘enée d ore from la ; in } P l
bli
The me tapla s t i' st em ,
i s u s e d tlrou ghou t th e Uxunisad s
int e x shanb ably w i th c and re f erenc e s t o it are p rac t i call y the sam e ,
W i th thi s di f f erenc e,howeve r
,that arway s re f e r s to the ey e i t sel f ,
a nd neve r to the senoe o f si ght . I t i s thu s a t t ime s care full y d i s tingu i she d
f rom when the lat t e r re f er s to the sen se o f si ght . Fo r instanc e , we
read that u was spli t in the b eg inni ng , and c ame out ; al so that
Kd i tya ,b ec oming ent e re d th e (Ai t . i s in th e
Th e s i ght o f the eye ,the powe r o f see ing v i th i t
, i s
due t o the go o dne s s o f Vi snu . (Nr sp . Ngau . 1)
As t o i t s ap p earanc e,w e f ind i n i t re d li ne s , wat e r , black and
whi t e . (Brh . I t c ont ain s Whi t e l ight , an d bey on d the b lue , blac k .
( Ch . In addi t i on t o th e se thi ng s , easi ly no ti c e d - th e red li ne s
no doub t re f e rri ng t o the t i ny bloo d ve s sel s o f the ey e — early ob se rv e r s
al so no t i c e d di f f e rent c olo r s o f the ey e,and mu st have at t ri but e d some
sp ec i al v i rtue t o each c olo r,thoug h that i s no t me nt i one d . In Brh .
i f o ne d e si re s a son wi th re d ey e s,he and hi s Wi f e should eat bo i le d ri c e ,
wi th wat e r an d but t er . 80 . in Mahan . 65 , one p ray s f o r di f fernt c olo re d
ey e s , g reen , y el low , an d re d . The splendo r o f th e ey e i s in i t s
L at er U pani sad s , be s i ie s ad d ing thatéi s one o f the part s o f the
b o dy b o rn to d i e , (EtmE 1) an d that t he eye of th e f o etu s dev elo p e s in the
si x th month , (Garbha 3 ) ad d li t t l e t o the real sc int i fic st at ement s about
the e ye . The imag inary sy st em s o f the y og in s , and the f o rc e d c onfommat ion
o f al l th ing s t o the i r b reat h s and b reathing s predominAt e in the i r i dea s .
Th e a i r c i rculat e s in the ey e s . (gfinq . Q rI j . . 28 ) The a i r
F ‘ p e r f o rm s the wi nk i ng o f the ey e . ( T rio. 85 ) The art e ry
ri se s to th e l e f t e y e ,an d b '
to the ri Lh t . ( T ri i
. 71) I n one pla c e
the art e ry i s sai i to go to the l e f t e ye . ( QrIj . I t s di sea se s
are c au s ed by th e ( imp ro p e r ) pas sag e o f a ir . ( V 0 . Cu: 117) It s di sea se s ma y
be p revent ed by rec i t ing mant ra s to the sun . (Alsi } b eg . ) The ey e i s no t
3 L M M am /(p od M w W W W 1 l KL W JLM x-O “
if“
a 1 r . tAdhyé . 1)
9 3
u t n i l so r'
Li -
e ”; Y r"
f l e d i th th t 4 . 15x l ) v i th “rahu . ,o r h o re rar * i full) ,
v i tl t l . 4 . 5 )
No t aOra 1 Ieal u nt ion i s xu i i in ti e lat er U1ani s i d s
a s t o i t s u e in t rel i gi on o
y‘ e re . It i s on o f the 16 v i tal 0
,t s i r
Yoga . \; Z n4. Tri ; . 131) I t i s t o he lo s eflo r
,e rt 11 o
‘er in Yc L u
u di ta t i on . tfli vag . ) In one { O‘
L of l‘ o ge it o t e s top ,
o l t,
he f ing er s4
\Yo . .u . 114) That o f the a s‘e t i * i s a
‘
l t o he h i s o r wat er
, o i . (Yi rv u ) It'
u t t o su rl e le x e d’
tlcm ., ffort, t o oh t rm
“
The J O I I& i s on or t } e j e to ti e lo tu s,so fa mi li ar i n th e
o f the Ind i an wr i t e r s,i s rs rel
,h e t v i t h i n the Urani sad s . Th e
Qol ien ma l e i n th e as: h s re i e_e s , l he
‘
o tu s e s . (“h . l .
F. 7) Vi snu i s
M vl o t s — odod . . Va su ) . So fi a + h a L sL i . t Sh V . l)
T“
efii nz i ng v i th P . S . l
,the le i t g i s se i i t o have a tlc u ssn
‘e
,e s .
) L L W 1“Bha s:1a . 2
(uah ih . 3, y
vet . The f i r st n had 1000 ey e s . ( Su‘
. 1} The s e
e y e s are ev er: h ere , Iah én . l
”
. i ) I s i s al so ii ve r sel_
e 3 e 1 - vi rfi 2 ; ; r i j . Th le i ty la s i nfi ri t e ; e
( T ri g . u . 2 ) Ti e de i t, ,i eatl
,in i n .nt . t i r Kri t
,u Ulan_si l, has I f n
' e l
ha s s‘
ro d s,
e . (Anna . Deat h l a ? t‘re c e,e s . ( Suh 1)
A tlr 0 r" *
W¢‘o rn fvom tle t ea s
c f ( n e lfin . T“e
an )‘
i s h ri lli snt 3s ihh s l i e e
,e i r ent ion e i in A ll
,
“
1.
” t‘
e r relat i r s t o ti e ifll t e s are ti nt “rahn i i s i .
t ) e ge . ( l . i t
i t‘
1 wat e r 0’the e
,e Fa rj r
,a i
s n t r l l,
J cnne st n l,h t
2 . 2 .
n\ 5 a“M W Q M . ) K M W bed }
Ju l Pt ‘
s u 1 Bal i t lave ‘oen JO J
'
1 x v
“j 0 rs 0 p t o H(
J
yob i n s q u a t
a zela t i on o f
ak si . Thi s
Line t o or e
i s al so
in Ygg a pro
97
olenrl, e s t n t li sh th e subo rd ina t e los t itn o f no e a r,
an ] i t s ie p ex lene e
o n int el lec t . Another Ufani sa l tel l s u s t" t i t i s o ne o f t he u tholl
ing in telli-ense . ( Pra ; .
Sim i larly , in some o f . no earl,Upani sa d s ,
.no tonne~t ion o f the ear
wi th the i s t ri ze d . In t he se U pan i sa d s the L ean ing o f i s b roa der
th a n i n the la te r c ne s , i nzlu iin; the sen se s,
an i hav ing s tro ng metarhy si c al
arrlioat i on s . Th e near wit h the ear . ( n aus. In sle e p it re ti re s
int o L Q L l N L i t s soun d s wih t i t . (Brh . 3h . h au s.
I t stan d s b ecaus e do e s . grrh . It ac compani e s an d defen d s on
an d the bo dy o f d we ll s in i t . ( Fre e .
Anon: the f i ve vi t al ai r s,both early an d lat e Uza ni sa ds t ell u s that
i s in th e ear . ( Ch . T rig . 81; ;and. Qri 3 .
One { a ssag e t ell s u s that - ' Tn . i t sel f dw ell s in the ear . ( Pre s.
A mong the o th er mo re o r le s s me taphy si cal st at ement s,we are t ol d t hat
F ra hma i s the ear o f ear s; the ea r do e s no t hear him ,but he h ear s it . (X ena
At death i t di s so lve s int o i t s el ement s , i t s g o i ng t o u
a nd i t s t o t s a 1a . (Han s . The se are the two elemetn s o f t hi ch i t
i s c ori o se d . Thi s pa s sage impl i e s that in th e di s solut ion o f the bo dy , the
e a r lo se s i t s p ow e r earl i e r than th e mi nd do e s,but lat er than the e ar .
T h i s i s c e rt ai nly t r ue in many c a se s . Ap parent ly f o r th e sa me reaso n , the
ear stan d s f i rm b ehi nd the ey e an d be f o re in 3 a in L au e.
agai n put t i ng th e ear int e rme diat e b etween the ey e and the min d . Furthe r ,
se e the c onnec t i on o f the ear w it h the dei t y , b elow .
L at er Upani sa ls add onl; mi no r ma t t e rs . Th e 5 5 0 6 5 Ln i W it ne s se s
w ith t he ear . (Trout . 2 ) I t i s in o ne pla c e- c onnec t e d. w i th t h e eloa ent
f i re , wh i ch i s rat h er unu sual . ( T rig . b eg . ) i s one o f t i e f o ru s o f
( QErIr .) It i s one o f the l‘ po r er s o r th e b o iy . (Ehav . ) The soun i
in i t wa s c reat e d h " Tlrahrfla from t h e of (C . C . It i s plac ed
i. ) ne by Pagurat i , who gave it ti n power o f hear ing . ( Pigu 11)
“i t . Anu s. Pru ;na I t sang th e fo r the de i t i e s in
the i r c on f li c t wi th th e but th e lat te r ran in and p i e rc e d it wi t}
evi l . ( F rh . F r,a gc or iing t o Ch . the ie itwe in me di tat e d on
the a s the'ear
,bu t th e p i erc e d i t w i th evil . C reat e d by
Pra j fipat i , i t beca me weary vhoddeath se i z ed i t . ( Trh . The de i ty
carri ed i t bey on d d eath . (Erh . Compar ed to the Ve da s , the ear i s
rfla nd t he h i nd the ear i s an i the mi nd ( Ch . so that
i t i s a nec e s sary su ppo rt e r to .. h whi le the lat t e r, the de p ending on
i t, i s y et supe ri o r . It i s al so sai d t o h
e the sy llabl e in t he
chant s . ( Ch .
”t i 1 In regar d t o t hodei ty , we f ind the u sual c ont radi ct o ry
stat er ent s , ac c o rdi ng t o the st and poin t o f the wri t e r,zi s to whet he r t he
d e i t y po s se s se s o r do e s no t po s se s s an ear . In . Erh . an d hand.
a s well a s in lat e r U p ani sad s , ( Brahma 2; 2 ; Paqu . 29 ) h e i s wi thout
ear . Th e s~ a s Brahma , has ear . (Erh . c f . Mund . T ’ e F
when rec e i ving an ear in the b egi nning , thou ght ," i f the ear h ear s , then
who a m I " ? ( Ai t . The dei t y , wh en hear i ng ,i s ear by na me . (Brh .
Th e ear i s Brahma . (Erh . I t c or e s f rom and re turn s t o Brahma . ( Tai t .
It i s the bo dy o f the inward re st rai ne r . (Brh . Brahma i s the
ear o f ear s . (Erh . I t i s one o f th e quart e r s o f Brahma . ( Ch . 3 . 18 . 2, fl
D ’rh ou b ec ome s lo r d o f th e e ar . ( T ai t . A hgit tle lat e r , th e
i s sai d t o b e th e ear . (Mai t . In one pa s sag e7 i s lai d to
b e the ear . (Mahan . 14) But a s thi s i s a pan thei st ic pa s sag e wi e re all
thi ng s are summed up in u i t do e s no t c on f l i c t wi th th e g eneral
i dent i f ic at i on o f t he e y e wi th the sun . A lat e Upani sad t ell s u s that f rom
the ear o f Pra jaxa t i and the were bo rn . ( Sub . l ) . Rudra i s no t
an ob j ec t o f the c ar . ( Ru drah . 2 6 ) Th e sun i s the ornanent o f Dev i ' s l e f t
ear . ( Dev i . 13 )
“I v .
i s ano ther variant f o r c r f ound in T rig . 72 ,whe re the
art e ri e s rfif“
and V. ; sv T are sai d t o go t o th e ear s . In Sa u bh . beg in .
the o r“ ”
F" i s emplo y e d on th e ear .
t i re i s a d i st inc t wo rd . As al ready stat e d,i t alway s re f e r s to h
the ear , an d nev er t o the sen se o f hearing . When th e d i e b ec ome heari ng
they ent e r the ear s . (Ai t . The ears o f th e p rimal nan sp li t and hearing
c ame f rom th em . ( Alt . We hear W i th ka réa . and i ro n“
i s loc at e d in it .
Mahan .
L at e Yoga Upani sad s s eas i de r them selve s w i th the art e rie s g o ing t o
the ear s , but g et sadly mi x e d ov er it .Vav
~sV i n i g o e s t o th e right , an d
c. ilhi - i t o th e l e f t . ( Qri j .
F
i g ? g o e s t o th e righ t , and y a ;"
_n’
t o the l e f t . ( Yo . Cu . It i s t o b e unde r st o o d that the se so- c all e d
art e ri e s are ai r c hannel s . The ( imp ro p e r) pa s si ng o f ai r in the ear s c au se s
d i s ea se s in them. (Yo . Cu . 117) One i s sai d t o i n st ruc t t he ear . (hu dg . 3 )
The nai ve ph i lo sophe rs o f early t ime s c o n si dere d th e roari ng o f th e
ear s whi ch may b e h eard When th ey are st o pp e d Wi th th e f ing e r s a s a p roo f
o f t he e x i stnec e o f the soul,whi ch p ro duc e d t he se no i se s in th e cav i t y o f
the heart . Thi s sound i s call e d the vaigvanar
a f i re . (Erh . wa it .
In Ch . thi s sound i s c ompare d t o that o f a f laming f i re , o r
o f a ro lli ng c ar,o r o f a bellowing ox . A lat e Yog a U pani sad t ell s i t s
vo tari e s t o st o p the ear wi th th e mi ddle f i ng e r s , to h ear th e p V,
soun d
W i thi n . (Mande l . 2 ) Yo Cu . 114 c ommend s the st o p p i ng o f theFarsb u t
say s no th i ng o f t i e sound .
” a“'
i c i e. Mant ra: are f requent ly whi sp e rs ! int o t h e rig ht e ar .
I n the c a se o f a new bo rn ch 1d one shoul d put h i s mouth t o th e chi l d ' s
rig ht ear and th ree t ime s mut t e r the wo rd so that th e child xmy
befindowe d w ith that facul t y . (Brh . Compare th e Grhy a sfit ra e . Ag ain ,
I n t he ol der Upan i sa d s , i s the mo st c ommon. wo rd fo r the no se ,
t hought we shoul d natural ly e x pe ct the simpl er I t s u se a s one o f the
o rgan s o f sen se i s early roc ogni z e l, and we are to l d that the no se i s the
vehi cl e o f all sme ll s . (Brh . The lat e Garbha al so t elldhs
t hat i s se rve s the b o dy in sme ll . ( Ga r hha l ) Itj s c onne c t i on wi th t heThe no se o f th e p r imal man spli t in the b e ginni ng and n ca me fo rth .
b reath wa s al so emphasi z e d f rom earl y t ime s . The a ir bec oming b reath ,
(Ai t .
ent e re d the no se .
p$Ad t . Th i s o f cour s re fu s e t o the b reath i ng o f a i r
th rough th e no se .D "
i t sel f dwell s in the no se . ( Pragna The lat e
Yoga Upani sads al so mak e the no se one o f the “ab o de s o f P“
ug ( T rig . 78
G ri j . 35nd. Anothe r lat e Upani sad t ell s u s that the r : 1
t he f o etu s dev elo pe s in th e 6 th month . ( Garhha
The no se i s sai ’ t o be the loc ali t y of :1 1~
( Il yana . 2 3 ) I n Prahag .
a sac ri f i c e4, where the bo dy i s c ompare d t o x x x akxzx ,
the no se i s the no rthe rn aht ar .
the smell in t he no se was c reat e d b y Brahma f rom the sec ond sound o f e ~
v l u t
’ As b reathing i s so impo rtant in Yoga , the c o rrec t mani pu
lat i on o f the no se i s an i mpo rt ant mat t er . One mu st b reathe through i t wi th
a g entle b reat } in o rde r t o ob t ai n Brahma . ( Qve t . One cav i t y i s to be
c lo s e d by t he f i ng er ,and the o the r c avi t y b reathe d through . ( Amrt a . 19 )
Thi s same thi ng i s en j oine d in c o nnec t i on wi th the mani rulat i on o f t he
art eri e s . See an d Z'
. i Th e r
i s t o b e re st xa ine d in Yo ga .
( San . 4b . 2 ; Kund . 19 ) I t i s t o b e st o pp e d hy th e inde x f ing e r s in one fc nn
o f n a . (Yo . Ru . l .
”
fi ) Anoth er rra zt i c e i s t o st o p the no st ril s wi th a
t hread wet wi t h ri lk . (Yo , Ku . The se re st rai nt s se em to re f er no t
onl; to the ex clu si o n o f sme ll s,wh i ch would i nt er f ere w i th th e del i be ra
t i on s o f th e y o gi n ,but al so t o th e breat
hre st rai nt . The holy sound
2
i s t o b e made th rough the no se . (A mrt a .
The no s e o f vare da i s l ong . (Vara dap .
t im e s it mean s r re ly the no s e,
e n[ e~ially in the la t e L lani ea ds Pra c t i
c all ; all o f thekarlie r re fe re r ‘e s u s e t ‘
e wo rd to mean the sen s e . Anu s
t e lls u s tha t by th e oneg ra szs smell s , and th i s may b c o n s true d a s
r f e rr ing t o the no se spec i f ical ly .
i s the do o r f o r o do r s . ( T ri g. b e g . ) I t s func t io n i s t o g ra sp
o lo r s . ( Narad . 6 beg . ) It s fun zt on i s s mall ,and i t s fi eld o f O p e rat ion i s
earth , a ‘
30 rd i ng t o the u sual t ea ch ing o f Ind ian phi lo sopi y whi ch make s
o lo r a qual i t y o f earth . Qari r . ) Bu t in one pla c e it i s connec t ed w i th the
e lei ent f i re . ( T ri g. b e g ) Ag ain ,f ro: th e no se t o the an t e ri o r f ontanelle
i s th e part o f the bo dy pe rt ai ni ng to but t h i s i s a rath er f anc i ful
pa s sag e , and ha s no thi ng t o do w i t h th e relat i onof smell t o the e lement s .
( T ri g. 140) Th e ai r c i rcu lat e s in i t . (05nd.
In a f anc i ful way,th e sp o t at the base o f the no se , wh e re i t meet s
th e end s o f thr ey e b r« w s, i s sai d t o b e Benare s ‘
I T - tha. i s , a ve ry
ho ly spo t in the body . (QrIJ . It i s sai d to the one o f the f o rm s o f
fix x x x x x i4x £ 5 j one o f the 16 power s o f th e bo dy . (Ehav . )
In t he same sp i ri t o f ex alt at i on , thr spi rit o f i nt ell ig enc e i s sa i l t o
s tart f rom it . ( Pa; u )
J J W S . It i s one o f the 18 vi t al spo t s in
Th e spo t where i t j o in s the ey eb row s in av e. u l e e t l sf . ( Ji bfila 2;
Ramao t . 4) The b reath i s t o b e slowly ex p ell ed f rom i t s orenig s in Yoga .
( Yo . h u . The o pening i nkt i s ) onne c t dd W i th th e na sal sound o f
0 and i s t o b e st o p p e d i n c e rt ain Yoga ex e rc i se s . ( V 0 . ha . Th e
1 8 t o b e emplo y e d on t . ( Saubh . be g . )
r
i s sai d t o b e the no se o f the de i t y . (Va rado t . 4 )
T i p o f No se .
The t i p o f the no se,nF i
’r be come s o f g reat impo rt anc e in lat e
Yoga Pra 3 t ic e e . I t s imp o rtanc e i s ma ni fe s t ed in three c las se s o f ir j u nut ions
nO st z ila are sai i t o c ol t ain ( Tri ; . llf ) Tle y a re t o s pu e e z e l by
t ) e rig ht hand i n Yo ga , ( Tri ; . 9 4) o r s to pre i by t ) f ing e r s . (Yo . Cu . 114)
grf j . Thei r u se in Yoga re s t raint s i s ment i one d in a mo re inde f in it e
way in Sa xbh . 3 .
Ch e ek s .
T he che ek s p lay an i nc
ons p ic ou s I art in Upan i sad li te ratu re .
i s u se d in tht enu me rat ion o f the part s o f the bo dy b orn t o di e . (Atm5 1)
Th e t i
l o f a she s i s t o b e put o n th em wi th a c e rt ain mant ra . (Bha sma . l)
ano ther wo rd f o r the cheek,ap lears onc e . That o f the de it y
i s the wo rl d g e rm - the h r J’
(Vara do t . 4 )
the li p s,are o f very mino r impo rt anc e . W i th the bo dy vi e "
e i
a s a sa c ri f i c e,the t e e th a nd li p s tog ethe r are th e rec i tat i on o f th e
hy mn s . ( Prini g . 4 ) They are to b e u sed in mak i ng tle sac re d soun i in
Yo ga . ( Aarta . 2 1) Ja cob s f ind s i t al so i n Ga rbha 5 in c onnec t i on wi th the
t o o th cav i t i e s,but it i s no t in my t e x t o r in Deu s se n
’s .
The li p s o f Sar a sv a t i ar e” a ll c o lo re ’
. ( Cara s . Tho se o f
Varada are long . (Varadap . Ti o se o f the de i t y c on st i tu t e f ault and
me ri t . (Vara lo t . 4 ) The r 1 o r f ema le mong o o se ,i s spo ken o f a s hav in
the li,s clo se d . (L aya .
Th e J aw s
“ITO ? j aw, i s the f i r st syllabl e 6 ! the wo r i
i n tn e a boli sm o f Tai t . the low e r j aa th e th i rd sy llab le ,an ‘
v ci s the m i idle one . Th e j aw s o f Pra j apa t i ar e the ncvins . ( P . 8 . 22 )
i i r ha s b een x ot e d above . (Ai t . 1.f ' ? .
A ) T i‘ a sre
c l 1 con ct’
e w it?
th fi x i to ] . T o f’ro ir the m uth i s tle fi re
(C u FHIS 5)”
he fi r dwell s in th s ou th .
rrsnsg . 2 ) The o l de st s tat i x ent i s that t he mouth i s ti e f i re .
( Mahan . O the r re fe re x c e s a s to f i re cor ing frOL the mouth o f t l r
de i t y i re not e i b elow .
h e re , o f c our se,we look t o th e lat e U
,ani 3 i
’s
. Th e
i s A ivl d o r re st rai ne d in Yog a . ( n eu
r i . 4;Y r
. hu . saub } . 4;
That o f ti e y o g in i s t o b e t urn e d t c the e as t o r i o rt ) . I t aha
should b e line t i e rel i g i ou s law o r (Varah . It r hou l l h e
ri n as i w i th w a t er,thi s b e i ng one o f .h Inri
’i c a tor; ri t e s . ( Prani g. 2 )
It i s t o b e c lean wi th i n,thou g h th i s p ro b ably re f e r s to wo rd s an d thoughts .
( hax ad . 6 . b e g . ) It i s u se d i n c o ve ring the d o r b y wh i c h the soul ha s t o
leave i n Yoga . 03nd. i s sa i i to i t . (Yara i . 6 . b eg . ; Vara idt
B) . I t i s t o b e ru bh e d wi th c ow lung a sh e s,wi th d i f f e rent mant ra s . (P rha J .
A g ain, i t i s sai d that v i th th e ex c ept ion o f the ux u th ,
th e
Who le bo dy i s t o b e c ove re l wi th a she s at dawn,tw i li gh t , n i gi t , and he fore
t h e two me al s wh i c } th e Xx x h in du s eat . (Erha j . I t i s one o f t h
sp o t ar n wh i ch t he Brahman put s tle ( Erha g . Th e un i versa
i s the rmu t } o f the asc et i c . (Iarad . 5 . end ) . A lecu liar st at ement x 1 3
froa ar e l i L p an i ea d , 3 Li s t i f o ne s now s In dra an t i s at out to c o. na t a
s i n,th e d r“ c olor 1 e s not leave h i s f a c e . (hau e . B. i ) Tl i s woul i se em to
have one re f e ren ce to the f lu shi ng o f the f a c e un ie r ti e la st o f c ons‘ ia
“xe .
The de i t y i s wi tlou t no u th ( Brh . i n
m l ddlfi a nd lat e t i an i ea ds , he i s“v o hav i ng h i s f c e i ) 11
di rec t i o n s, ( §vet . g
‘
ni . 3 ; AV j a } ta T r ip 3. o r
( d ahln . 14; ri f . A . Ti e o f th drainia
1 1 ( n q sp . Bra n 5 has fe w
de i t i e s i s i r d t o ov rc
o. e th a su a i l 1 th .
”
o l o
fi ?
)
l ine i s i d en t i f ie d w i th the fi r . ( Ch .
hai t .
L at e r Upani ea ls add that it is on e o f the loc ali t ie s o f
( T ris. 78; QrI j . ;End. I t i s t o ‘ e ke pt~l e sed in YoL a . (Varfih .
The de i t i e s are sa i d to have thei r s turne d t oward the r ight o r
sout h . ( B ik e. 1)
i s a rare wo rd in th e Upan isad s . One way wo r sh i pp ing th e
Brahma li g ht i s b y f o o d and d ri nk thrown int o the mouth,c on si de re d a s the
f i re . (Mai t . A mant ra not e s i t s c o nnec t i on wi th vo ic e .
(sw an . 72 )
L . _ i s anot he r ambi guou s wo rd,meani ng ei the r mou th o r f a c e .
Wi th a sing le ex c ep t ion , i t i s no t f ound in t he early Upani sad s . Th e
ex c e p t i o n i s Tai t . 6 , whe re Brahma i s sai d to have t hre e v c ,
a; the
Ve da s . Natural ly i t s chi e f u s e i s in the r
a
gig iou s realm
,thought Amrta .
3 sp eak s o f i t a s drawing in wat e r .
Breath i s t o b e inhal e d b y the in Yoga . (Yo . Cu . 114) Sauhh . 3
gang. In th e la st c a se,i t i s to he ac c ompani e d b y the sound
an d thi s wi l l remove hung er; th i r st,and the liho . lt i s one o f th e part s o f
the bo dy to rec e ive the t i laka . (Brha j . Bha sma . 1) In thi s re f e renc e
the wo rd woul d seem t o mean th e fac e o r some part o f i t rather than th e
mou th i t se l f .
Brahma i s sai d t o have f our mou th s , ( Dhyfina . 12 ) an d th e r
one i s ment ione d in Ru drah . Th e W o f Ganeqa-. i s li k e an ele
phant's , (Varado t . 4) whil e Devi al so ha s one . ( Devi . 13 ) A seve re one
i s ment ione d, ( in Harad . 9 . 4 . Tho se o f the 1
“
h e are tefe rre d t o
i n Ru drd h . 1. 11ff; 2 . 1ff.
al so o " ur s a s a wo rd fo r ti e t e eth . The t e e tl are to b e
u se d in { re ar i ng down the tongue in V e g
“. ( San. 4 . 1h ) The planet s and
lunar man s ion s ar e t h e t e e t h o f t‘ r to i t y . (" arn ’
t . 4)
Th e T ongue .
The tongu e en j oy s the li st i ne t i en o f t eing h o th a and
a h r " r that i t , b oth a knowl ed ge andAn ac t ion sen n e - rat h e r ti e
o rgan f o r the se two sen se s,f o r b y means o f i t we ho th ta ste an d st eak .
Bu t it i s the func t i on o f ta st e whi ch i s u sually empha si z e d in c o nnec t i o n
wi t h the t o ngu e , and thi s i s c o rrec t,f o r whi le the t o ngue i s the ma in
o rgan in t a st i ng , th e re st o f the mouth c on t r ihu t ing mu ch le s s to ou r
K nowl e dg e in that di rec t i o n than the to ngue ,i t i s o nly o ne out o f many
o rgan s engag ed in t he p r odu 3 t ion o f sp eec h . 80 whi l e the t o ngue i s s onnet t e d
wi th sre ech ,i t i s no t con si de re d th e o rgan o f sre ec h .
old and lat e Upani sad s ali k e re f e r to the t ongue as the o rgan o f
t as t e . I t 1 8 a f e t t er mani f e sti ng t a st e . (Erh . It i s the neans o r
si t e o f all ta st e s . (Erh .By i t one g ra sp s th e t a st e o f
f o o d . (Kane. I t i s a. re mher o r inst run ent of int elli genc e , and i t s
real m i s t ast e o f f oo d . { Int e lli g enc e i s e s sent i al f o r the e x e rc i sebf tl i s
f unc t i on,f o r Wi thout i t o ne c an no t c o gn i z e ta st es . Qxau s . mo re
g ene rally , i t i s o ne o f the o rg an s by whi ch on e may p erforu .worhs . (Ha han . 50)
A mong the lat e Upani sad s , ca rbha l t ell s u s that tle t ong ue serve s
t he body i n t a st e . Simi larly,t e s timo ny is b o rn t o thi s fu nc t i on h; har ad .
6 he g . ; Trig . b eg . ; jari r . The la st nen e i c o nnec t s i t wi th wat er as i t s
f i el d o f O p e rat ion’r ightly link ing t a s t e and wate r . In one rather f an ci f ul
, a s sa g e i t 1 8 c o nn ec t e d wi t } th e element f i re . ( T rig . b eg . )
F1u rti e r info rma t i rn i s that i t i s a so rt o f i n st rument un i t ing th e
two j aw s . QTa i t . I t we i h e 12 o r 54 (Ura . s . ( Garths 5 )
Thro‘h i ng in the t i p 0'
i t t rdi zs t e s iea t! i n t‘re e day s . ( T rig . lzfi )
115
whi ch me an s slnpi y the cavi t y 1] ti n roa r o f the nc uth . (Yo . 3u . He re
again the tongue i s sai d t o travnree thn shy . (Yo . Cu . 55) One oh j nst t o b e
ained b y put t inb the tonL u e aba ins t th e pn1a te i s th e supp re s sinb of t rea t}
t remo rs . tgzbq .Th e t u ng ue as u ee i in som e Yoba pre e e t o d raw
in ai r . (gang.Y o . hu . j rfj . Thi s our '
e c ort a iz
41 8 9 3 8 6 8 , and even b r ing s immo rtali t y . (gang . Kolii n air thu s
at the ba se o f the t ongue u s line dri nk ing nec tar . ( QriJ . The tongt
i s s%a e e u se d in e xrelling ai r . ( T riv . 110)
De i t i e s as . The de i t y i s sai d t c h e wi thout t o ngu e . (gang. 2 ) Again ,
t he t ongue o f the de i t y i s Bhara ti . (Varaiot . 4) C e rt ai n ap p ari t i on s l ic ke d
the sky wi th t he i r t orgu e s t o f right en Brahma. (Varadot . 3 ) C ari fi e d
but t e r i s the t ongsofi th e g o d s . (hahan . Th e ea ) oial f i re ha s
r ‘4 ‘
Je
‘ t . Tl f t s u nnion f t} t vul l in i t . l .
f. l
,
\lo re i t’
s t c a l le d ln/ I n bu t 9‘
1 t o } an,0 L
t d IQ
1 zurt 11. li n e ni‘ lle ,
8011 LC"Q t } . b u l b x
w ‘L d fiq
o”It
'
r . ( i “hi s sub b s s eh : m 1’ o f .H f i s s . 1 l t
it s ,
“( l i re xw lz A
u t irvt‘1 r s
Qe,mak e s tli s a
t o n e s a t o f
t i e l*
1 t ol l that i t nv
n li n e a 1 rue i x
,Jn : . l
‘A U i O t h e 2 i s sa i l to he a t th e f ot orth e
rlate
,an i t } t tl
‘L s 11_ o f the t ong s u
fi r st t st ore t re t“ t remo r s .
i d v i t J Ea ‘P o’ '
0 1 t } .
Ah a Q w V i b ) i x tl e r or of th M out h i B M e n t iore d in ler var ou L
i n oonh o t l on W i th l ob e 11& 3 L 1“9 5 . The t ol
uu e i s t o b t hru st in t o i t i
a c f You;,e sre
fll ll; i n t hat s h own as “
t r ( l b . C u . 52; gi ns .
i s “nc ti r nam e for the sen s [ le ze Vac o r sle ec } i
s . i d t o b loc u te u in i t . ( Se u th . 3 }
3 . ( Yo . Su . 50 ) It i n o f t‘e I rt e lf
b od,
é h o x e the f o u r fo~t“r ‘
x L (“r .a 2 ) .1 1 16 o f i s
1r e do. i .nt 1: i t(
"
o . 74 )
Th u sual u se i s ma le or t} ? I O P n . roe n
,r
Varah . 5 .
’
D
a i r,i s to c arri e d to i t i . YoL n . (n euri . ll ; gl i J . Ai r i lrawn t o
i t f rom t‘ e t eet },nr i
uo e s t o the b rea st i n a ze rtnwn L in l o f lo
ve .
( gri g . Th e bo dy i s to h e fille i V lth ai r t o the nec k 11 sor e f e rn s o f
Yo ga . ( ) i nd. It s ai r we }‘ e dri v en o ut h y p re fe r b r e ath ing . (Yo , nu.
Co nne c t s 4 W i th ti e b reathi ng i s“ontri ot ion of the nec k ,
Whi z ? 1 8
oft n en j oine i . Se e ,
in a i lt i on to the re fe renee s e hove
,Yo . Tu . 57Yo . n
u.
l . 51,52
, 9 5nd. Con t ent r e t ion o f at t ent io n i n i tgive s knowle i
og an d ( Qanl. It:fi c av i t y i s to h e rut t e d i n c er
t ai n forms o f YO Q a . (Yo . n u . It i s on e o f the i t Vi t al spo t s 1
Yoga . (gang. Tl e y ogi n ot t e ins re lea se by g et t ing ti e
t o s lee,
above i t . ( qfind. I t i s to tense d in mak ing the ho ly
soun i i n Yoga . ( Au ri ta . 74 ) That o f th e dead i s re p ro duc e d W1 tl ti e si x t h
o f the t en o f f ere d, ( Pi ng . Th
e‘
u mant ra i s t o i s
H o nr’ on t i e ne c k
, (“r sr. an d the emflo, e d or i t .
‘eb
The s to he t orn on the neat,and thi s f re e s o ne f rom ai r .
(Et ha g . vase . ) A she s a re.u t on ti e ne c k and i t s i de s t o t
‘
e
soocnrani h ent c f a s ort a n . e nt re . (Ti s su e l ) L ro sary 0” 1 ° t o
b e wo rn on t’
e neon, (Ru drfih . en d ) t o c ort al e 32
( Rhe su s . 2 )
The neo n o f i s b lue i s K nown by tle well L n owr
aH ells t i on Nilaku ntha , ( naiv . 7) Vi snu wea r s th e ab out hi s
q
nec k . (Av1a3 . ) Sa rns vat i a nd K i flh" w e ar r ee kle t s or t t e i r tlroa t s . ( Saras . ;
Gopfii ot .
“le t o f A r ena i s sai d t o b e " fi l d o f in llt ie s . (Corfilot . 27)
Tlo ne on o f Varnde i s wellsle y e d . (V r e le p . h w} r know s the ”
rha j gfi
b ile Upani sf d t th e v ti e doe . ) del i v ere r l * the tl r at . (Br‘nj .F
. 17‘
121
. o un d i s t u fl sgo t t he re t he so ul sp li t s thr shull in d epart ing .
T he f o rm o f
th e stat ement v oul i fi t tle who rl o f lai r at tle h ash o f the‘ ead
,but
the slo t regularly L i ven a s ti e ex i t o f tle soul i s fi e ant eri o r fon tanelka
o r th e,unc t ion o f the co ronal an d sag i t tal suture s . ( Tai t .
L a t e Spani sa is a id li t tl e to th e s t ov e . The o r tofiho t i s
ma de f rom the hai r . ( Para s . b e g . ) The hai r o f a woman i sFai i t o b e b lac k
a s ta tea ent h earlz un i ve r sally t rue in Ind ia . (Yaj . 9 ) B u t the hai r bleach e s
when wat er f ai l s i n the t o dy . (Va rfih . A y oga pract i c e o f f ill ing th e
bo d; Wi t? b reath to the hai r s w i ll c u r e di s e ase . ( qind.
T h e n th e b o dy i s vi ew e d a s a sac ri f i c e , the Pai r 0“ th e hsa
’
i s the
sac re d b ra s s , ( Prihag . 4; F arbha 5 )
R eli gi ou s . The w ear ing o f the ha s already b een re f e rred to
abo ve . The twi c e- bo rn,f o r the p erfec t inr o f hi s work s
,leave s seven o r
e i ght hai r s f o r thi s an d s have s o f f the re st,t o geth er wi th hi s
b eard an d nail s . (Harad . 4 end . ) The wi se man wear s h i s hai r a s a t i
{N5rad . However th e me re weari ng o f th e loch i s noc ing , f o r tho se
who have no t s nowle dae a s thei r a t have merely hai r a“ (Brahma 3)g m i m m ( l< M A /g L )
uflt ing th e hai r in the spring i s part of th e sannyasin ' s sac ri
f i c e . ( ha nth03 . 4 )\Shav ing i t o f f p ro p i t iat e s gi va . (Bha s ma . 2 ) In a c e r
ta i n f o r m o f Yo ga the bo dy i s to h e rubhe d to the en d o f the hai rs . (Yo . I u .
The hai r o f the g o l den mal e in the sun i s g o l d en . ( Ch .
the hai r o f the head i s c o nn ec t e d w i th the t re e s , t o
wh i ch i t g o e s at death . ( Erh .
se ems t o b e a var iant o f t he sh ove wo r d . I t ap p ear s in harad .
6 , be g . ,where i t i s st at e d t‘at when -m ent ali t j
- is in the ha i rs , one
th i nk s o f sel f .
123
i s the 1'
o f the a s ze tic . ( Parana) . 2 )
Again ,wh en wo rn
, the t olhnot o f the Wi s e man i s lia ene d to f i re .
(Nara l . f f ; RRmarah . Wi th tli a i s c onnec te d the say ing that the
sa int s,in Parad i se
,have f laming
c( T ri p . H. It i s al so i denti
f i e d wi th the b i o r soul . ( Parab . b eg . ) Agai n ,th e soul i s sai d t o
have three i t s ( Pacu . wh i l e inner and out e r “i i are reco g ni z e d .
( Parab . b og . ) It i s in the nature of d iva - the t i s , e s senti ally a s ze t i c .I
a‘
( Ni rvfina ) The wo r shi p pe r i s to p has e Rama in i t . Réuarah .
T“!
l t o 3,are wo rn in i t o f f o r it . ( Bha sma 2; Ru dral . end ) The r
"
i s t o b e boun d t o i t . (Nrsp . The my st ic sy llabl e v '
,1
)i s sa_d to
i t in ado rat i o n o f Brahma (Raha s . l ; Varadap . Ot her sy llable s are al so
u se d , a s e I . 13 r li'“
m u , ( Dat ta . 1)
I n th e symbol i c bo dy sac ri f i c e,th e “
i n k : i s the Ve da . (Mahan .
Rud ra i s the o f the dei t y . (Mahan . 35 ) “0 a s i s sai d t o the
o f t he ”
r .r e 5 1 5 . (Nrsp .
f i ve”_a nf
c
meani ng th e same a s j i kb : i s f ound imax t ime s in Nils r .
a s part o f t he ep i thet of Pudra,who i s c all e d Blue- t o pkno t -Nilac _ .1:
L o ch o f Hai r .
the c ormmn wo rd in th e lat er language f o r a look o f hai r ,
de sc rib e s the ap p endag e o f c ert ai n c las se s o f a sc e t ic s - th e Balai hilya s ,
and th e Kansa s(Kcraa a 3 ) Harad . 5 en d ) Such 1 loch i s to ado rn th e he a l o f the Rama
wo r sh i p p er . (Raxuarah . Ramm h in s elf we ars one,a s ( Rs ap . 25 )
die al so wear s one - ( Quad .
'
a s bo rn w ith one o n li s head . (Avy ay . 5 )
The vz riant0? ap pears
,an d i t i s sai d tha t th f lo ck o f the
a sc et i c shoul be shave d .
f o ur and a hal f s rore s o f them . (Garhhn 5 ) It would b e in
t e re sting to know how thi s numbe r was arrive d at,but no c lue i s g iven .
Ti e hai r s are sai d to b e c ompo se d o f th e element earth . (garir . )
V r t i A n o l d m ent i on o f the hai r s i s that when th e b o dy i s
vi ewed a s a sac r i f i c e,th ey are the -i o r sac r i f i c ial g ra s s . ( Ch .
wanes . 6 4 . l) Thi s i t al so sai d o f the hai r s o f a woman at th e t ime o f
sex ual i nt e rc our se , whi ch i s lo o ke d on a s a wo r shi p o f Praj apat i .
They are a l so c alle d th e smok e o f the sac ri f i c ial f i re . (Erh .
and are c ompare d t o th e leave s o f the f o re st . (Erh . In Ch .
they are sai d to b e the h ifihi r “ o f the Sama chant s . It wi ll b e no ti c e d that
all th e s e c i tat i on s are f rom the o l d Upani sad s .
I n the o l d Upani sa d s hai r s are f requent ly men t i one d in f igure s and
c ompari son s . Ob e yi ng t he inst rc ut i ons o f Pra japat i,I nd ra and Vi roc ana see
themselve s t o the hai r s,that i s to th e s malle st det ai l
,in a pai l o f
wat er . ( Ch . As hai r s sp ri ng fort hrn man ,so all t hi ng s sp ring f o rth
f rom the Inde st ru e tible . (Mung.
Ir“t ilc r i — a
gai n st the hai r s
Eaga i nat the'
g rain”,
or unna tu r al,i s an ex pre s si rn wh i ch has c ome down fsom
a ve ry early t ims . It i s ag ain st t he hai r s f o r a Keat riya t o t ea c h a Brahman .
(Erh . Thi s no doubt owe s i t s o rig in to the i d ea,o f t re p eat e d in
San sk ri t li t e rature,that the hai r s ri se w i th plea surabl e sen sat i on s .
Th e he i rs o f a ho r se are onc e ment io ne d . The sp i ri t,in g oi ng f rom
th e br dy t o Brahma,
shaled o f f i t s evi l s a s a ho r se shak e s o f f the du st
f rom it s hai r s . ( Ch . In dra ' s hai r s are al so ment ione i . No t o ne o f
th e m wa s i nj ured in all hi s hero i c ac t s .
“all l OU Th e hai r o f th e a sc et i c i s t o be cu t o f f f romthe armp it s
and p ri vat e part s . ( San . 3 ; Xanthag . 5; hand. 10) They are to be c ut o f f
by a sharp i nst rume nt . (Yo . Ku . They shoul d h e t u t in th e sp ring ,
a i i are { art o f the as~e t i c '
s j ,o f f eri ng . ( L antha ; . 4 ) Th i s seems
t o iflpl? tha t th i s o’
fe ring wa s made in t he sp ring . He re , o f s our se , lat e
Upani sad s furn i sh the mat erial .
Arm ) it
Th e ar mp i t , i s m ent’one i a f ew t i me s , in a ri tual i st sense .
The ha i r i s to b e shave d f rom it by the sannyasin ,a c u s toni regu lsr lv
ob se rved in In dia t o da y . ( ( San . 3 ; Kanthac . 5; Kund . lo
i s an ol d wo rd,o ft en ap ply ing t o t he f o rearm merely , but in
t he Upan i sad s g ene rally re f e rring t o th e e nt i re li mb . In wh a t may b e c alle d
the s c i ent i f i c u s e o f the w o rd,the ol de st ment i on i s that one ma li ve
w i t } hi s arm s cut off,hen ze they do no t c on st i tu . e th e e s sent ial part o f
thdhc dy . ( Xau s. The nex t re f e renc e 1 8 that th ey are the e sp ec i al
loc al i t y whe re st rengt h i s f ound . (hahan . 72 ) St i ll lat er,they enu me rat ed
amo ng the part s o f the b o dy b o rn to di e . (Ktma. 1) Anot her lat e pa s sag e t ell s
u s that th e o r sup reme spi ri t - r
: f* t ravel s between the le f t
arm and the ri ght hi p , whi ch mark s the part o f t he bo dy t ouche d by t he
sac re d c o rd . ( Pica . beg . )
i s sai d t o b e the an a o f the Ve da knower . ( Rkfik . lo)
R el ; c . Th e p re sent cu st om o f hol d ing up t he arm by asc et i c s
may be t rac e d far back in the Upani sad s in some f o rm o r o th er . The f i r str igh t t o saw
ment i on i s the ho ld ing up r f the
Asr
mgdn a charm . (Kaus. Then King
Brihadratha st an d s wi th hi s arm up rai se d f o r a thou sand y ear s in o rd er to
o bta i n me rit . (Mai t . L at e r Upani sad s en j o in the . ho lding up the arm
by th e a s c et i c . ( San . 3 ; Brha j . 4,end ; Kanthaq . 5; fhx amap . ) In ano th e r
sy st em o f wo rshi p,t he ar m rec e i ve s the t r “ ( Brha j . Bha sma .
Thi s f ree s one f rom sin s c ommi t t ed b y the ar ms . (Brha j . Th e ro sary
o f i s al so wo rn on th e arm . (t a j . Pu darh . eni ; Bha sxa .
The la st ment i o ned refe renc e st i pulat e s 16 t o b e wo rn on ea c h arm . The
le f t arm i s t o be g rasp e d by the ri ght hand i n c e rt ain V oga pra‘t i i e s .
( T ri pura 3 ) The m n” i s t o b e bound on th e arm. (Nrs p . The
e i . e i s to b e emply c e d onfit . ( Sauhh . b eg . )
c omxaring t h e ro i t o a staf f,i s onc e u sed
,wh en i t said
that by it a ball i s th rown. (Yo .
“u . 27)
Upp e r Arm s .
re f er s e i ther t o th e shoulde r or t o th e an'
s J u st b elow
th e shoul de r . Th e t ~i s t o b e p i e c ed the re . (Brha j . Th e
i s wo rn th e r e by Brahmacari s,vanap ra sthas , an i gr) a st
‘
. a s .
(vasu . )
bahuma c .
'
ci s ano ther wo rd
,u sed onc e
,t o de sc ribe a part o f the
a rm t o rec e ive the t r i'
t s ( Erha J .
a f i s hardly a se parat e wo rd f rom th e la st . I t re f e r s t o t he
up pe r arm, an d i s t o rec eiv e a t i lc ; r f o r th e Wind—god , Prabhanj ana ,
dwe lling in i t . ( F rha j .
PO ream .
mean s ei the r arm o r f o rea r m The wo r i ap pears but onc e ,
*wh en
i t i s sai d thj ht the i “ 2‘ o f the c o s mi c al p u ru sa are th e no rth ea st
and southea st q u a rt e rs . ( 3rh .
el i c h mean s th e f o rearm ,i s u se d a few t i ~ e s . Th ey are t o be
al ; l i e d t o the nec k an d the thum b s in some o f th e Yeaa lo stu re s . ( T ri ; .
The foreann e o f Varada are c mpar d t o c lub s . (Vara dap .
the foreamn , i s t o rec e ive the w i th
( Brha j .
Tax ing by the han d i s men t i oned in the f a mil iar ca se o f t ea che r : nd pup il,
(Erh . and also in the c a se o f a p r i sone r . ( 0h . A sinile
i s u se d in wh i ch a wari i or i s re p re s ent e d as t ak ing 1 dea th -d eal ing weapon
in each hand . (Erh .
The t rea tme nt o f the lat e r Urani sads i s,a s wa s to be e x p ec t e d
,
mo re bar ren . The hand i s one o f the wo rk ing sen se s ( Su b . 5 , 9 ) It i s u se d
t o t ake fe e d in . (gri j . S i s in i t , (Gan ) . an d ni n
i t s j o i n t s . ( T ri c . 80; QrIJ . 4n
9 )
n “c
_' The ri ght and l e f t hand s are tflhe and the "
re sp ec t i ve ly , that i s,the ladle and the but t e r rec eptaclé ,
wh en th e bo dy
i s vi ewe d as a sac r i f i c e . ( Pranag . 4 )
Beg inning wi th Mahan . the lat er Upani sad s deal wi th the
han d s in a re li gi ou s sen se . The f i r st re f e renc e i s,that a s th e han d s are
ac t i on o rgan s th ey comm i t . sin s, (haha. The a scet i c mu st o ve rc ome
hand by han l. ( duht i . He c arri e s hi s wa t erfla sk in hi s han d (Karena 4)
H e eat s wha t he ob tain s by them W i se men are slohen
o f a s g i ving int o th e han d . ( Go p i . 4 ) Th e han d s o f the dead are re s to re d
W i th the f i f th o f the t en o f f ere d ( Pinda . a 6 )
Then come t he rath e r nume rou s use s or non — u se s f the han d s in YO ga .
zhe a sc et ic shoul d not even t ry t o c ro s s the rive rs wi th hi s hand s . (flare d .
7. b e g . ) The a s cet i c f o ld s hi s han d s ac ro s s the bo dy below th e nafiel .
( Yo ga; . 2 )" h e re are numerou s u se s o f them i n o r Yo ga p o sture s ,
T ri c. 9 3
( Qfini. 1. 3 ; gri j . 32. Among o the rs the f o llow ing may b e m e nt i o ne d . The no se
s v i t y i s to b e held by th e ri ght hand n Yo ga . ( T ri g . 9 4 ) Th ey are to b e
u se d in ho ld ing f i rm ,- that i s
,in s tc pring the le f t no se ca vi ty .
They are t o ho ld th e ear and o th er o rgan s in Yo ga . (gri j . They are t o
b e si re ad on the g ro un d in sor e f o rm s o f Yog a . ( Varah . Th e ri g ht f oo t
i s t l b e g ra spe d in one f on i o f Yoga , (Yo ,Tu . Gf ) an ] the 8
“
W SW“;
bdth f ee t are to be g ra s p e d . ( T r i c . 45 ) In the p ea f owl po sture
13 6
i s almo st a s c omm on f o r han i a s It i s u se d in larg ely
t he sa me sen se s , though the re i s a ten lency t o u se mo re f o r rel ig iou s
and f o rmal i st i c mat t e r s , wh il e 1 p revai l s in the se cular sen se .T hi s
i s e sle c ially t rue in the mo de rn ve rnac ular,h ind i
,who re -h
“
( f rom 1
i s the wo rd us e d in the o rdinary mat t e r s o f l i f e,whi le
i
i s u se d in
c o nnec t i on w i th such sac re d o r qua s i sa c re d f o r mulas a s pa r f o r
mar riag e .
Th e ol d Uxani sa i s t e ll us that c an not bqrec ogni z e d in the dark
( Erh . I t i s u sed in maki ng a negat i ve si gn , ( Frh . and in
p lac ing thing s . (Ma han .
L at e Upani sad s in clude i t among th e wo rk sen se s,
and de f i ne i t s
func t io n a s that o f t aking . (gari r . ; Varah . 3 ; Narad . 6 . be g . ) In one
p lac e i t i s sai d t o b e pe rmea t e i by t ouch . ( T ric . be g . ) The han d i s one
o f the 16 power s o f th e bo dy . ( Rhav . ) It i s c onnec t e d with th e e lement
earth . ( Tri g . beg . )
‘
e li g i o d s . Th e t ak i ng o f the pup i l ' s hand by the t each e r , and th e
b ring ing o f fuel in th e hand o f the pup i l , two symbo li c ac ts , are ment ioned
in b o th early and lat e Upani sad s . (Erh . Ch . fund .
1G . B . The han d s are t o b e wash e d af t e r a sac ri
f i c e . ( Brit Th ey are t o be u se d in e t rik ing a woman a s a
so rt o f love chan r i f she wi ll no t con sent to him . (Erh . The son
lay s hi s han i on the shoul de r o f hi s dy ing f athe r to receive h i s f athe r ' s
d y ing bene di c t i on . ( haus.
A lat er Upan i sad in t reat ing o f the Wo r sh i p o f “rfg c through dr in k ,
enJo ins
L
t a a ing wate r in th e le f t hand and ap ply ing i t t o the h eart . ( Prfi nag Z )L h
uL A W “J , “ M (kkSoon come o the r a s ce t i c and Yoga i dea s . Th e a s ce ti c i s t o go about
whi ch ma y menu e i the r w i th a begg i ng ve s sel in hi s hand,o r w i th hi s han d
as b egg i ng ve s sel ; t he lat t e r i s mo re l ik ely what i s r eant in the YOg a
Urani sd d s . (Kanthaq . 1; Krune y a 5; Nara l . They are to be drawn in as
138
wo r s hi p . ( Vara dot . f ) The re i s al so f re quent ment i on o f them in Yoga
p rac t i ce s . The y are to he u sed in a mo re o r le s s inde f ini t e way in Veg a .
( Saubh . 3 Yo . an. in Wh i ch they are one o f the 18 vi tal part s o f the
Th ey are t o b e c la sp ed f i rmly in Y
oga . (Yo , Cu . 40) The
f ing e r s o f hot } han d s are t o b ehse d in Yoga . (mandal . In one f o rm o f
YOga the y are t o st o p the ear s . ( Trig . 115 ) In t he c o ck —po sture the hands
are b etween th e knee s an i the thi gh s . ( T ri c . 40 ) I n ano th er f o rm they are
to g ra sp the rig ht f o o t, ( 95nd. o r t o b e u sea f i x ing the f ee t .
(Yo . flu . Th e “r ro sary i s to be put on them Wi th i t s p re fe r
mant ra , (Bu dral . th e t o u chi ng o f whi ch i s e qual t o the g ivi ng o f
2000 c ows. (Erha j . Ru drak . l . end ) Fi nally , th e hand s are ment i o ne d in
mant ra s , ( Dahs. 8 . ff ) an d thei r puri t y re f erre d t o . ( T ri pura
-
c c There are no t many re f e renc e s o f thi s t y p e . Th e o lde st ,
an d the o l de st u se o f the word , i s in Mai t . whe re th e han d s o f the
th re e sa c ri f i cial f i re s b ear one re sre c tiv ely t o i Vayu,I ndra , and Brahma ,
By the c o ntact o f Vi snu 's han d s
, c else st i al know le dg e i s ob t ai ne d . ( T ri p . u ,
arena has a how in hi s hand s . ( Gopalot . 25 ) Infiéze hand s o f the de it y
are sai d to p e rvade th e o r di sec t ions . (Vara dot .
The doub t ful wor d i s al so i ncluded hsax x here . In c e rt ain Yoga re s t raint s
i t i s to b e p lac e d on the b elly,heart
, neck , and mi db o dy . (Io . Ku .
52 )
u se d o nc e , se em s t o mean the hand . Th e l e f t arm i s t o b e
p lac e d in the riglt in c ert ai n Yo ga p ra ct ic e s . ( T ri pura 3 )
The F i st
i s a n o ld but ra re wo rd in the Upani qs d s . It L oan s the c lo se d
han d . Th e f i r st use o f th e wo rd i s in Oh . an ! i t i s sa i i th a t a s the
wi thou t the alIQ Q L B one“ler v ar t o l d that ti e
; al ms o f ti e nd s shou l l be sp rea l out , evi d tl, t o iz i te t e ‘e tai l o f
a IOa JO C h ,in the g earowl fo eture i n Yo ba . ( Tr i ; .
The meaning o f the c ompound for th baem o f thr han i i s
o‘v1ou s . Th e wo rd i s u se i in haha s . in ex ac t ly the same co nnec t ion s a s
d u c te d aho vo,i s u se d 11 th e sa . e la s sace . Ano th e r 1r . tan~r 1 8
whez the o f a s he s i s to be pu t on the bas s o f the l e f t h n l,
W i th a cert ai n mant ra . ( Bha sma . l )
ng e r
onc e 11 a bahuvrih i c on foun i and
! nay m ean
e i t i e r f in b ar or t o e,but unle s r Wl th some di st i ngui shi ng wo r l relat inb
i t t o th e f oo t,i s u su sally t o b e t alen a s relat ing t o the h i n i . The f i r st
u se o f t i e wo r i in the Upan i sad s 1 8 i n P+ S . 1,“h ere Purusi i s sai l to
e a t nd to a d i stanc e o f te n fl i g e rs b ey ond the wo rl d on ever ; 8 140 . Thi s
stat e . e nt s aua i n j u ot e d in Svet . ( 14 ) “E ll e t ‘ e sho rt “u lt ala
Ula ni sa d ,a con ue rt a r; on the f i r s t l art o f the P . S
., t ell s u s that ti e
e x p re s si on to a g e r s he re M ean s an i n fi ni t e d i stanc e . (Hu dg . Th e
wo rd i s u se d a s ar e x pre s s_on o f r e a su re ' e rel,
i n Yo . Cu . 9 3 ; Q‘
s } . 4;
M ent al . 2, Adva j .
,and nur erox s ot le r plac e s whi ch i t i s n t Vo lch wh i l e
to du t o . A s ar i llu stnat i on ,
‘
t i s se 1 th t i n Yog aoreat ll
uft e n ten d s
two fi nb e r a‘ ove the navel 1rd tw finL e r s b elcw the gen 8 . gTr‘
5 )
The f“
g e r s a rc . e r tione i a s a I rt c f tl r t : 1_ in I tnfi l . I Prir'
b
1,an i al so ir Ra h as1a ,
v14
re n t. e a te l tlo follox n“ rle r , b 0in
n i ng wi t } t } thu . b .
wi ll b t reat s } i e lo“. Tl e f ing e r s or t } iead r yrodu'
e d wi“ ‘ e
fi fti r o f th e t e z f'rere l. ( Fi ,la . 6 ,
X Q H g fl“A E l;1
1 0 u
’t 0 r te w“
. C‘L .b.
l o
fo l ;
A i p A
jve t o i o ]. oc. . l c I‘d
,M \ o 3 M t ]
7o 1 0 4; 1 0 . . h . o
qt
”I L r“ I
,
H e s s‘a s s
" a ti e pur ' o i C u l’ ‘
c ti d al“i t . ii i s t o f t
‘i i n
U
u su c h elos s f lan e . Th e que s t ion i ri e s a s t c ' I e“e r t i i :
c cnc e p t i or li d no t ari se f ro. the s i z e o f ti e 1 f t vent r c le
o f the i c art ,v1 ch an s ‘ e r s to the do s x ri p ti on o
f ti e heart chanb er .
9 T i c eyt i nc f r r t‘c a
rr s sag e in K tmfi l l e - e t i e th u i s
eru wv rat
e d ar c n t i e rrrte r f t h e h
cdy ,
th e re qair'
rg u se s are cl i e flg i n
t he reli ; i u s sense .
”
h e ol’e s t u se ; r i s in T r} . C .
A. S
,whe re i t i s u se d
t o Il“h up falle n t~emen
,along w i th the ring f i ng e r ,
t o plac e i t on th e
t re . st r forelea ‘c
’ a “ox an . L t e r i t i s u se l tc ’
or .‘e ear s
,.hat one
pla~e i n ti e heart . (Ya t .
m i s may furn sh a c lue to th e cormonI n F
if J ' o
c a act i ~s o ’ sta r
ri ng th e ear s . In cc nre c t i c r t i t } ti c li t t ’ e fi nLer
,
i t u s a’
nc t L an o"
e r’
ng t rr
. r \srasab l ) “h f
s I' t i n it
q
i s i i tC1 " rent
. 2) ” h Iror
h r sy l lah le*
0 u se r crne c
"on
i t s u s e i s r u f u i t i h u se d ‘f a
'
orat c rn o' “
r1h1 "\f u’
f
f f t tzio . 4 . i i ) n l i t b oo} tli x
uto v e e r t
’
- c 1,
u
it: (Er
ha j . 7 Wh " 1 r
‘“ 7” m fo l u s e } thui t . QT‘
a
'
d t ior L n ie’ e ai rlo; . eh t ti n t‘u.
h1 c
v.,
ti e } rO to te u e ’
2 Iol’i n[ 1 2
"
th t a i . p a s s c l ‘
le r i c s‘r il ,
. SC”
I . 3 ; h Ale v it‘
I n f'
h
i i t s
u J u l U u w i t s t i t) ; L L 4 m . x u 5 1 ‘ [ 1 L . b u
1) i x.,11 ll u d J J. ;i t s a
‘
o za t ioh
in L c . l i f o f Pr 1,u“n t n
’
\hun u e . Tu t in
f. 2 . , 1r st e d 0
’th 3 6 , u nd i ruthufi j u (V5 , u u ry o I t s t o
u s d 11 ru t‘irb on t } t i {Erlu j . fihn s xe . 1) It i t o b u d
ale . “ t i t } he thu ab t o u‘ r r1110 0 ir s e x i ng m j s
t ic S I L P B . {Tz irur”
j
i s u se d in Tru e ) . 4
1 u . i L ILL t' L .
a t -v n vu ri s nt f e rn s forx ti e su ne s t em , sharac t eri z e t}
ti i r i or ri ng f i ng e r n o th namel e ss F I I
LG F , lo s s inl} b ecau se i t wa s 1 Pfi
*u lt t o clare c t e ri z e i t b ; em_ st oc ial t O G U ll a f l t ) . It s u se 1 si , 1le r t c
th a t o f t he ot he r f i ng e r s , thouui i t 1 8 onc e f ound i n Brh . ,
wlero i t 1 8
us e d i r 3 c nnec t- on W i t } the t hu ,
’
to,i 3 “ u: { Al len (Erh .
B ,i t on r i s e s c f ferin
ut o \Br3 n5b . 1) I t s 8 16 3 13 1 s
,11at le i s
i nd i t i s use d for Brahnfi ,nm
" '
“ad Yi j u . {Rala s . l . en l; ?
I t i s to b e u se d i n cart ° i r c on ii t ion s in lu t t ing on the’
11"
( Erna ) .
VJau . ; Pla srs . 1) h i t } tho thunb an i o th er f ing e r s , i t i s u se ; in
& “u inL M y st i c el gn s . tTrlru ra 3 )
F urth ringe r
t he su,e i lc t 1ve Q A PL O S S ou x i ia o f li t t l o r l i t tl e b
fi i b e r . fiz t } t an i tle thumt one o f f e r s t o the ma in b reath , \Px ififlb .
1) I t s s , llat le i s an s i t s de i t i e s “r thma
, Vi su ‘o
1 , nd, 2 ) It i s u se d “i t h) tlui t a 1 c t‘ 1 f inge r in “u s in
m ; -t' “
si gr s . ( T rlpu a 3 )
i s an old v ord , wean ing th e le~ wh ich see 9 t o heave
dx o ; ,ed out o f the u se o f ti n philo srhe rs . T10 4 0 o f the sac ri fi zi al ho r se
are day an l ni Lht . (Brh . c on s t i t ut e s the leg s o f the two part s
o f gu ru sa in th e so lar o rb, h i o f the l art in th e i ight ey e . (Erh .
Th i ghu ru
i s e s so i ally th e " b road",the th i gh ,
b ut somet ime s ma y re f e r t o
th e h ip s . Int ere st in t he thi gh i s chi e f ly from the rel i g i ou s st e ndpoint .
St ill , we are tol d that one nay live w i th a b rok en th i gh . ( haus.
One ' s st rength i s in hi s thi gh . (Hahan . 72 ) L at e r U1ani sa d s t ell u s that
i - q C i rculat e s i n the th i gh , ( 35nd. n 3 . o r
The , are enume rat e d among th e part s o f th e p e ri shable hody . (RtuE. l )
Th e earl i e st ment ion o f the th i gh i s the sho r ing apart
o f th em in t he L .. s _ Drh . They b ec one o f g reat imp ort anc e
in th e Yoga Urani seis . Th e th igh i s one o f t i e 18 vi t al srot s in Yog a .
( Trlq . 130; )5r 4. 9 ) I t i s one o f the si x ,o r t en ch i e f part s o f th r ho dy
in wor sl i i . (R imara. . One S i t e on them in Yoga». ( L auri . 14 )
t hou ; h t i s t o b e c onc ent rat e d on th em in med it at i on . ( Ramarah . such
c ons ert rat i or fu rn i she s on e wi th hnowlodg e o f " si . l t 1 ( Qfi nd.
he re i s m u g ] men t i on of th e th i gh in YOg a y c stu re s . They are u se d in
many a q Q Q ' 3} Va rah . The righ t f o o t i s some t i u e s
Int on the l e f t th igh . Qind . Or,th e f ee t are to b e pu t on
op po si t e th igh s in the lotu s p o sture . (Yo , Au . E sp ec ially t he sol e s
o f the f ee t . ( Tri; , 3 9 ) Post are t o b e pu t on oplo si t e thi gh s al so in the
he ro an d f i shba zs po st ure s . ( Tri ; . In the s ock po sture , the hai d e
a r e to b e plac e d b e tween t he s nee s a n! the thi g hs . (Tri7. In the mo l
iat a t ive Worshir o f Rama ,one should s i t wi th hi s le f t hnn l o n h i s le f t
th i gh . (R ilflfi f tlh . 2 0 4 )
t o b e p re s s 1 in n a . ( Tri j .
The k ne e i s one o f the 18 v i t al spo t s in Yo ga ( Trig . 1315 Q IQ T. 9 )
I t i s one o f the 10 po int s on ‘ h i c h the mind i s t o be conc en trat e d in
wo r shi p . (Bina rah . Su ch conc ent rat ion give s one snowle dg e o f i ahd t ala
loaa . ( 95 nd. In b reathi ng s , ai r enbOr s the kne e f rom the th igh , and
g o e s thenc e t o the lowe r leg . ( gri j . The b reath i s thu s drawn ur through
them in Yoga . ( K euri . 7) The s ne e somet ime s rec ei ve s the t i .
The c '
. t i s emp loy e d on th em . ( Sau bh . beg .
D“
LO Rama ha s hi s han d s on hi s hnee S - ~ henc e thi s i s t he c o rre c t
at t i t ude f o r wo r shi p p er s . (Ramara h . The hne e o f Varada i s c onc eale d .
( Varadap .
c 1 . Th e kne e o f th e dei t y i s F a a . (Varadot . 4) Bhfirlola i s on
th e hne e s o f the coémic al bi rd . (Nada . 3 )
Ian he though an 011 wo rd
,i s no t Found i n the early Up an i sad s .
I t se em s to mean pfébp erly the lowe r le g , b elow th e knee,but at t i me s
a hade s o f f toward s the part o f the 16 2 ab ove the hae o . A c i rculat e s in
i t . ( ( qand . gr i j . Wi th the j o int s , th e leg s are c alle d In’r v 7 "
( h eu ri . 13 )
i c. The mi d lle oi the s f i a i s one o f the 18 V i t al spot s in
Yoga . ( Tri ; . 12 9 ; 95nd. Conc ent rat i ng th e at tent i o n infEive s one
knowle dg e o f a t .1'
L e s of cour se the leg fi gu ve s in b reath ing s .
Breath i s d rawn up f rom the f e et th roug h them . (heuri . 6 ) In t he “r r
ai r pa ss e s through h em f rom the hne e to the to e s . (grinx . O c ca sio nally
th e; rec e ive the fil l .a . (Erha y . Th e cr
’
i s emp lo y e d on them.
( Sant h . b e g . )
De l r. The leg s o f Varada are mu scular . (Varadar .
“r s: The leg s o f the de i t y are tVa ra ie t . 4 )
( Sub . 5} OarIr . ; Narad . 6 . b eg . ) In o ne pa s sag e i s a s se rt e d t o b e
in th e f eet, ( ;Hnd. though p e rhap s mo re core c tly ,
’“
r i s sai d t o b e
i n the f ee t and i t s j O i nt s . ( Qri ) . Trig . 86 ) The f oo t i s one of the
f o r ms o f Jn . h ; ( CErIr . ) o r one idj t he 16 power s o f tho bo dy . ( Bhav .
Th e f ee t are conn ec t ed wi th th e el ement earth , ( Trig . 1. beg . ) e speci ally
the part f rom th e knee t o the f o o t . ( T ri s. 134 ) They are sai d t o sup po rt th e
qual i ty o f f o rm . ( Trio. l . b e g . ) The soul,l ik e th e de i t y ,
i s sai d t o have
f our f ee t , that i s , the f our stat e s o f th e b ody , wak ing , dreaming , soundNrsp t 4.
sle ep , an i t he " f ou rth" . Seare d . f f ) Th e f e et o f th e emb ry o are dev elo p e d
in th e thi rd mo nt h . (Garbha 3 ) 5“dm m W W V“a” W h ey)
F igu rat ive . The f ee t are the chari o t in the b o dy sac ri f i c e . ( Prahag . 4)a rule , pa s sag e s in whic h th e f ee t have a re li g i ou s
c o nne ct i on are lat e . The earl i e r one s st at e that sin s any b e c om mi t t e d b y
the f e et . (Bahia . ment ion i s al so made o f o ne ' s set t i ng hi s f o o t
f o rward in the futu re wo rl d,when he mount s t o th e couch o f Brahma. ( Kane.
The de i t y i s sai d to b e lo rd o f two f oo t e d an d f ou rf o o te d c reature s .
(7vet . 4 . 13e JuA f a/ 3 )
In Yoga th ere i s much ment i o n and much u se o f the f e et . They are t o
b e drawn in a s a turtle draw s in hi s membe r s . (Yoga t . 13 ) They should b e
dc uhle d u1. (Yogac. 2 ) They are u se d in vari ou s n c '
.c c. (93nd. Somet i m e s
th e in j unc t i on i s BlE Ily t o ex t en i them o r ke e p them on the g roun d . ( Varah .
Tri } . 50 ) They are some t i me s to b e f i x e d or hel d f i rm b y the hand s .
(Yo . nu . 148) Tri o . 45; Yo . Cu . 6 6 ) Whi le th e right f o ot i s so h el d , the
le f t i s p re s se d against the y o whi ch woul d se em to mean the lower part
o f th e ab domen ab out the g eni tal o rgan s . ( qand. The la st ver se
sre c i fi e s t hat ti e heel o f the le f t fc ot i s t o b e so employ ed . Th e f eet
are t o b e h el d out st i f f in the lfi x x s x i r fi x pea f owl po sture . ( T r i g. 48 )
Onc e,ai r i s b re athe d int o th e f ee t . ( ) ri j . Thought o r at t ent i on i s
t o be co n c ent rat e d in th e f ee t i n wor shi p ,
they b e ing among th e ch i e f part s
o f th e bo dy . (Ramarah . Conc ent ra t inr at t en t i on in the so le s o f
Ti e r s are h ang hflS ’flJO S m‘e re " e le t ) i s sa
'
i to have h i s f e et
e ve rywhe re . ( ; vet . I ahfin . l4; Bha s ma . 2; On the o the r land , the
de i t y , un ter vari ou s name s , i s sai d to b e W i thout f e et . ( h ung. 1. 1.f;
P§ ; u . 2 9
gvet . Brahma 2 ; haiv . 21; Ru dra h . 31; Narad . Pha s ma . 2; gin; . 2)
A s i n, a " t o th e numb er of f ee t
,Rud ra i s sai d to have
6 ) The di ity ha s three f eet, (Mahan . a s ha s death . ( Cub . 1) The
sun , ( P ra ; na and the have f ive f eet . (hrsp . Th e
ere b o rn f rom the f e et o f Pra jap at i . ( P . 8 . Sub . l)Vara lot 3@
Q
Th e f o ot o f Pragapat i i s (wai t . 6 .f ) As t o t he f e et o f oti e r i nii vid
ual g o d s , the fe e t o f Ru dra are t oward t he south . ( Q i ra s 3 ) Hi s f ee t are
lo tu s lihe . (ga ra . he ov e rc oz e s dea ‘h wi th hi s le f t f o o t . ( Qa ra . S )
Th i s sa me f oot li ght s t he ey e o f Vi snu . ( Qara . 10 ) Ma ri , freo l f rom sin ,
{ roa i se s t o b ec ome a devot ee o f giva's f e et . ( Brha J . Th e f ee t o r Rama
are on the hea d an d heart o f hi s wo r sh i p p e r s . ( Rama rah . guha mah e s
ob e i sanc e t o the f o ot of th e de i t y, (R u dra h . 2 ) Al th e chi e f g o d s do
W i thr.
M . L Q W .5
reverenc e i n the f o o t . ( Qara . 5 ) w u {Lo/J
The ear th , i s sai d t o have b een p ro duc e d f rom th e
f o o t o f iu ru sa . ( P . S . 14) hun g. A lat e Upani sa s st at e s that the ear t h
wa s p ro duc e d from the f e et o f th e deit y . (Va radot . 3 )
the o rg an o f mo t i on , i s a lat er an d we re poet i c l o rd than
the o l d - f a sh i one d r
"
d e t axhy s i c ally , th ey are o r f o rm s . ( T ri p . h .
Th ey are du e t o t he mani f e st p ower o f t he de i ty . ( Si te .
The f i r st u se o f th e wo rd in a rel igi ou s sen se ,i s that
one touch e s th e f o ot o f a sup e ri o r in b ob ginva b o on - th e coun o n frao tl o e of
t o day . (Hai t . . 3 )“u re f e e t cro s s int o the h i
u
‘e r heavenly re alr s . ri n .
h . The wi sh o f o th e r s i s th r f o o t o f .he y e b in . (h-rv . ) Only twi ce i s
the wo rd u se d i n co nne ct i on W -th Yo ga p o stu re s , Wh i ch illu st rate s no
lu a se o f the di ' f e re co Y e e i n tl i s wo rd a nl Th e ri bht fc ot i s to b e
9A’
o
'a l
'
r t 7,l et-m od u
l ”
c 1 c t ‘ 0‘e i t i s ai d 0 b
lx f t e ‘
e“ 5 010 f a
,
f G t . \1 cu . U
”
) “L 1 11 )o C H
1 1 1 fi s h ;
av n t t‘
i e le o f the fo t . r" J . Again, 1 oe rta
'
n L racce s
,
the be t
,
4 fdmlod L th i r f r tl c rewr o f the l ead t ‘e so le o f th e
feo‘
ar 1 e d‘
a a b , lu t ti ng ti e s o l e " i n th e c, fo i t e
t h i I ( T l i } . c ; Yo . “1. T or”
1 e ti e $010 o f tl i f t in
MQ m a r . a
“i 1 A
t . e s [ oat re s, -e e i ri
,.
,l nd . 3
, yi l J . 3 .
t '
Da ( i t a
kor i n the so le o f one f oot f o re t ell s doa . 1 i n a ; e r . ( Tri q .
The re- is no ment i on o f the g reat t o e,
s . aro e l; a ment i on 0’
1y t o e,
unt’
l the Yo:“re r i g
’ is s pyoar . I n c a t h e g reat t oe,
f ror i t s b e ing t . e
mo st re ot e p rt ( f th e bo dy , a s sur e s h ush ix porto
r e e . Two art e ri e s,or ai r
ya a“; o r e surf se i t o c onvo ai r t o ti e grea
‘ toe s . Y ,
"
I h 1
b e e s t o . 1 0 1‘
t,
a r’
h t o th e rib
h t . Zeri J . It notLp
ni j a i t i e a t e ri e s g o i ng t o the se t o e s are sai l t o be e u n i
( C ) Tt L re t t s co . e s a locali t,o f p r
t l i r li ne l,
rot o re ct t o ”in ? t‘i f b
reatl n s unl
tl '
(T
r" 9; géh i
Al l t " ab c v re f e ren c e s l o v e r l r' t e a
e ll,
verj f - o c . m .r o
v e r,f
’n
.n ar'
‘
e r1 i i i
n i x»
wrd
f) r C li : t i o
“I“
b
.
l1 1
Q 1 3a .
q q 0 q ». ‘ QQ
h ; o 10 A I D
i t i s one o f th to m e o f one of t } l pow r :
o f th body . It s n e s t d w t ] ‘t e elo eat 6 th,
n i i i i t c
su prort the fi nal i t y o f or t a s t e . {T ri ; . b e
When woman i s c on si de re d a s tn al tar - ° i e i th e alt ar o f Pr ja.t i
thi s e rg n s the fu el o f ‘l e B w
‘l l fl ‘ ial f ire . ( F ri .
l ) F ri ~t ior i alr li e d t o it in 3 nnec t i e n w i t } a love mant ra.
ho t u u‘h ment i on i s ma de o f the L i n the reli L i ou s
athe ro , some o th r “6 r d t i nu i re
f
e rre d,though the o rgan i t s e l f i s no t
Q U I t G a s lro i inent the re a s one mi ght have ex rec t e d . That o f th e Pari vra j in
o r warde ri nv
s e sst i z i s t r be welft uar ie d -le i s not t o b e le d into s in
i t . ( Narad . From t h at o f the asc et i c th e hai d i s t o he re a c t e d .
tSa n. 3 ; a anthaq 5; Tarad . 4 . 0nd; hun I lo\
T e st i c l e s - P ri vat e part
a vs . ) ol d wo rd,
i s u se d hu t onc e ,
Whe re tho se o f Pra ga , at i
are sai d t o be th e soma, ve s se¢l in the sac ri f i c e . (Brh .
i s th e e‘u ival ent t o th r Ing li sh "
lrivat e"
. The wo rd i s C ae d
a fev t ime s i n hi s lat e r Urani sad s . T he i s t o b e sh eared ' it‘oh dur g
a she s to the ma nt ra ki lns tBrhaJ . I t i s one of file
72 fart o f ti e b e d} t o re c e ive ti t Brn a J . I t s t o b e
tou cle d in F ) The 3 T i s em p lo y e d on i t . ( S dubh-bou.
a soot h t o c ov er th e,ri vat e ze rt s , i s e rn ove r i t .
(N'
rad . 4 . en d )
‘embru w vi rile
{ o i the m s t rut t'
rile ,aproar in ore f . l 13 U
.i $ 18 °
i s the mo s t c ommon wo rd in the lat e Upani sad s f o r the x ale
o rg an . I t s main u se i s in Yoga ,and many o f the pa s sag e s in c onnec t i on w i th
i t relat e t o it s po si t ion in th e hodyr i th re f e ren ce t o o the r organcl .
'
1hi s
knowl e dg e i s a hel p t r th e c o rre ct p rac t i c e o f Yoga . It i s ment ione d a s
a part o f the ex t a nal bo dy . (Itwa. l ) The art e ry lu?‘
( 93nd. o r
( T ri s , . 72 ) run s t o it . c i rcu lat e s in i t . ( 95nd. Tri ; . 79 ) It i s
loc at ed in th e reg i o n o f t he b o dy known a s T W " '
1" (Yo . c u . 11) The
“
n i s two f i ng e r s ab ov e i t , ( Yo . Cu . 14 ) an d the mi db o dy — o nc e c a lle d
t he two f i ng e r s b elow i t . (dead . 4; Gri j . Varah .
The wi l l . _ i . whi ch i s p rac t i c ally the same , i s b etwee n i t and the anu s .
50
(Varah .
I t i s one o f the 18 vi t al sp ot s in Yo ga . ( 95nd. I t i s t o be
re st rai n ed in vari ou s Yoga po stu re s , chi e f ly by put t ing the foot o r ankle
ove r it . ( Yo . Cu . 114; Qand . gri j . In one po sture the hand i s
k ep t ove rt-it . ( Tri o . 49 ) 13: Yoga , a g reat li ght i s sai d t o ex t en d two f i ng er s
b elOW , that i s , t o the mi dbo dy . ( Tri o . 6 5; Yo . Cu . 10)
" i n; i s a derivat ive f rom th e same roo t a s the last , an d i s pra c
t i c al ly a vari ant cg it . It i s one o f th e 18 v i t al srot s in Yoga . ( T rig , 330 )
A throbb i ng in i t f o ret el l s death in a hal f mo nti . ( Tri o . 124 )
17_- 1 p ro p erly means th e t ip o r end o f the peni s . I t i s ment io ne d
only in some lat e YOga Upani sad s , whe re i t i s t o b e sque ez e d by the ankle s
in vari ou s po stu re s,such a s th e b? J “
v (Gand 3 0 8 3 9 5
gri j . T ri o . 44— 45; n j .
164
i s u s e d in a pe s s im i st i c pa s sag e in Mai t . whe re the
0
bo dy i s sa i i t o have eme rg e d from thi s di sgu st ing plac e, the u rinary po rt al .
The s ' c c the unment ionabl e plac e o f women ,i s re f erred
t o onc e in a p e s si mi st i c pa ssag e in Narad . where i t i s sai d to b )
li ke the wound o f an inJu re d art ery,
i ec e o f shin spl i t into ,sc ent e d wi th
cand sec ret i on .
"t i s sarca st i cally sai d t o tho se who tak e p lea sure
in i t .
Womb - L ower Abdominal Reg i on .
i i ha s a ve ry g eneral an d vari e d meaning . At t ime s i t re f e r s t o
t he womb ; at t i me s t o th e vulva o r f emale o rgan s g ene rally ; in many ca se s
i t i s u se d in the sen se o f sourc e o r o ri g in ,W i thout any re f e renc e t o the
b o dy at all . I n the lat e Yoga U pani sad s i t i s u se d in a st i ll di f f e rent
sen se he re,re f e rri ng evi dggly t o th e lower ab domi nal reg i on o f the man .
Th e pa s sag e s whe re t he wo r d re f e r s t o a part o f t he bo dy are i nc lud e d he re ,
a s we ll a s a few o f the f i gu rat i ve pa s sag e s .
en~ a s the bi rt h p lac e o r sou rc e o f o ri g i n i s b e st de sc ribbd in
Ga rbha 4 . The f o etu s i s rebo rn in many When relea se d f rom th i s l i f e
i t g o e s t o gi va ,Naray ana ,
o r Brahma,o r learn s Sankhya o r Yoga . when i t
at t ins the do o r o f the '
on: i t ex peri enc e s g reat pai n,whi ch cau se s i t t o
f o rg et all p revi ou s bi rth s . From Mai t . we l earn that th ere are 84
lCh r “3 ni s o r f o rm s whi ch the soul may b e bo rn i n . The 1
i s sai d to b e in the l (Yo . Cu . 14 ) I t s func t i on i n p ro c reat io n i s
re f e rred to in a ma nt ra . (grh.
m M
M 1h" M u
W W w é fi J )
It i s a l so sai d that th e C may be en j oy e d i n a sp i ri tual stat e
w i thout thini ing o f th e bo dy . ( Ch . The here Brahma , ent e rs
the i in a bo di ly f o rm . (hatha . Ir reali t y ,one i s bo rn f rom t he
se em s to mean mo re pro pe rly fo etu s or emb ry o,and f re quent ly
ha s thi s t anning .”u t i t i s somet ime s put f o r the WO L B
,and somet ime s f o r
reb i rth . A quot at i o n fro" R . V . in Ai t . h ero att ribut e *
to
Vima ieva,ment i on s tb s s el f a s ly ing i n the womb an i c o n s id e ring all the
ene r at ions o f th e r o d s Th e Urani sa d tak e s the meani ng o f th i s f igu rat ive
ve r se l i t e r lly , and t hi s fu rni she s u s wi th an in stanc e o f th e b el i e f so
o f t en ex pre s se d in th e Mahabharat a an d el sewhe re,t hat in srme ca se s a t
lea st , knowle dg e ,e sp eci ally i n reli g i ou s mat t e r s , might b e po s s e s se i
b e f o re b i rth . A li t t le la t srrhan the above,i t i s sai d th at Pra j apat i , a s
prz ra move s abou t in the womb . ( Pre c na Bra hma i s in the womb . ( Qvet ,
Th e 5“z :n i s as i f c o nc eale d i nkhe womb . ( Katha . Pra j apat i
dwe lt in th e p rimal womb . (Mahan .
I n t he pe s simi st i c thought s o f the ph i lo sophe r s , dwe lling in the
womb,whi c h i s c onn ec t e d w ith reb i rth
,i s someth i ng g reat ly t o b e drea ie d
an d t o b e avo i de d i f po s si b le . Thi s i s di sc u s se d son wz in the lat e Upani sad s .
The sannyasin f ear s dwell ing in th e womb . ( San . Advay . ) Bu t the twi ceborn
b ec ome f ree f rom fu tu re dwel ling s theéin . (gi ra s . 3 ) The dei t y sav e s f rom
f ear o f the womb . f} i ra s . 4) So doe s the wo rd (Ramo t . 2 ) Salvat i on f rom
i t may b e Obtaine d; ( Dat t a . 1) e sp e c ially by knowl edg e o f the garabha Upan
i sa i . (gara . 3 6 ) Ir thi s c onnec t i on may b e ment i one d th e doub t ful pa s sage
in Oh . where the re i s a p ray er that one may not at tai n t o th e
t o o thle s s,whi t e
,sli p pery th ing , gene rally unde rst o o d t o re f e r t o th e womb .
The womb o f o . i s ment ione d in than . 3 .
Pra j afat i i s sa i d t o we re in th e womb . ( P . 19 ; Ta deva 4)
168
T he Int e rnal Organ s ,
Th e st at ement s about the int ernal organs c ont ain much mo re that i s
p rob lemat ic al , imag inat iv e , and unc e rtain,than do the pa s sage s whi ch t ffllt
o f th e ex t e rnal part s o f the b o dy . To b eg in wi th , in Upan i sad t ime s , even
in me dic al c i rc le s there wa s no t mu ch knowledg e o f th e int eri o r o f the bo dy .
Theo ri e s large ly t o ok the plac e o f knowled ge and o f f ac t s . Natu rally the
i gno ranc e wa s greate r i n ph ilo so ph ic al c i r c le s,an d thi s igno ranc e d ee p ene d
a s t ime pa s se d on . One acquaint e d wi th I ndian and li f e and the Indian hand
ca n not bu t f ee l that the re wa s li t t le c onnec t i on between the anat omi st and
the phi lo spher . The well knownstory o f the ex pu l si on o f th e Acvin s f rom the
semi fi c e o f the go d s , b ec au se they we re phy sic ian s deal i ng wi t h all c las se s
o f men t y p i f i e s the f e eli ng in re gard to med i cal men,ev en at an early t ime .
W i th th e pa s si ng o f t ime and the ri se o f Jaini sn. and Bu d dhi sm , th e ho rro r o f
tak ing li f e,handling the dead, en d mut i lati ng th e bo dy g rew ,
so that th e
o p p o rtuni t i e s f o r real anowle dge o f th e st ruc tu re o f the b o dy c o n st ant ly
d imi ni she d , and e sp ec ially in rel i giou s c i rc le s , Where thi s fégi ng would b e
st ronge st .
In early t ime s,t he u s e o f animal s in t h e sac ri f ic e woul d hel p to
c o nv ey much knowle dg e o f t he st ru c ture o f ti e bo dy . The 0 3V 1L € Cb u pa s sag e d
in th e o lde st wri t ing s may b e e spec ially not e d in th i s c onnec t io n . Bu t the
wri t e r s o f the Upani sad s had ve ry li t t le hand in animal sac ri f ic e s . The re i s
a sing le ao vame
"
a pa s sag e in the op enining sec t iofiof one o f the o l de st
Uzani sa i s; lat er sac ri f i c e s are o f th e gr? t y p e , o r some wo rk i s sub st i tut ed
f o r the ac tual sac ri f i c e . The g ene ral t endenc y o f the Upani sad wri t e r s i s
t o sp i ri tuali z e t he sac ri f i ce } of to sub st i tue someth i ng el s e f o r i t .
Th i s migh t be knowle dg e , o r c ont empla ti o n . I n th e lat e Upani sad s , Yo ga
p ra c t i ce s , and the u se o f the ro sary,o f sac re d a she s o f burnt cow lu ng , and
the t i les we re emp loy e d , a s they are t o day
,in the pl so o f o f f e ring s .
And o f c our se
,some o f th
' v ery lat e U pani sa d s are v e ry re cent i ndee d .
W i th the se p ra ct ic e s,mo re at t ent i on would b e pai d t o the ex t eri o r o f the
Acc ording t o 24h .“rl i s comp ounded of the three syllable s
and v ar‘ tha t i s , to b ring
, to give,ani to go , the cont ext ‘
t i shGWing tha t
y fi , to g o , i s meant by the thi rd sy llab el, th e 1 b eing si mp ly th e c a se
t e rm inat ion of th e c ompl et e d noun .
Ju st what phy sic al o rgan i s mean t by ”
QR A reader of the Upani sad s
i s impre s se d quit e a s much by th e part s of the b ody not ment io ned as he i s by
tho se wh ich are ment ioned . For in st anc e,in all t he Upani sad l it e rature the
lung s and liver of man are not ment ioned at all . The only ment ion of them i s
c ont aine d in the li st of part s of the sac ri f ic ial ho r se in Erh . Th i s
giv e s ri se to th e op inion that th e wo rd was used a s a general t e r m f'
for the
v i tal o rgans - tho se of t he thorax- ~who se real nature and func t ion s w ere not
known t o the writ er s of th e Upani sad s . Care f ul study of the u se s of the wo rd
s t rengt hen s th i s op inion . I t would seem that while ”
:d wa s somet ime s u sed
for the heart alone,at othziiizt we s
tgzzgfor the heart and lung s t ak en
t ogeth e r , as might well b e done f rom than: b e ing so c lo sely connec t e d .
i n oth er p lac e sAgain
,i t s scppe seems to have b een st i ll mo re general .
As f ar as the early Upani sad s are conc erne d , it i s b e st to t ak e them
up chrononlogi c ally t o ge t th e i r t eachimkin regard t o -the le e rt . TI i s b rin g s
.0u t it s dual func t ion,phy sic al and met '
phy si c al . In t ,the heart i s
id ent i f i e d with Erha na , on: th e g round that a pe rson without a h eart i s of
me u se - there c an b e no such thing as a per son wit hou t a heart . I t i s the
bo dy and re st ing plac e of al l thing s -all thing s re st in i t . Whil e the ma in
thought here i s no doub t p sy chic phenomena,which are suppo se d to be in the
heart,the re i s p robably some re f e renc e t o phy sic al l i f e al so . From the
pu rely phy sical sid e,the heart i s the plac e of o rigin of th e ar t eri e s .
The
elast ic u se of th e t e rm. art ery ,ni d f will b e di sc u ssed lat er. In Ch .
we are t old that 101 Art eri e s o ri ginat e f rom th e heart , and thi s i s rep eat e d
0in sagha and lat e r Upani sad s . Ac c ording t o Brh . arte ri e s
Proc ee d f rom the he art and sp read throughout the ent i re body . The impo rt ant
172
how much i s to b e t fl ken li t e r o lly an ! how much f igurat ively . I t i s as sumed
that the pa s sage i s in the main li t eral . Again j u st what i s L eant by I
c ca“ I t i s t ran slat ed ab ov e a s lo tu s bu d . u se d in thi s c onnec t ion , may
meenthe bu d , the calyx , or th e see d rec ept ac le of th e f lower . Th i s la st c an
har dly b e meant he re , so the qu e st ion re solve s i t sel f int o de t ermining how
far op ene d i s th e lo tu s bud to which the heart i s c ompared . I s i t c lo sed
up t i ght ly , o r mo re or le s s opene d ? F or it i s rea sonable t o sup po se that
the c ompari son of the heart ot a lotu s wa s o riginally based on ob se rvat ion .
The writ er may b e re f erri ng t o the heart alone , whic h do e s indee d somewhat
re semble a t ighly c lo sed lotu s bud . But i f t he lungs and heart b e t ak en
t ogethe r , and th e c ompari son made to a lotu s ézt ly expanded,the re semblance
i s much more strix ing . Th e lobe s of the lungs are ve ry sugge st ive of th e
p erianth of a lot u s in thi s c a se,but i f the h eart only b e c on si de red a s
re f e rred to by “rdar a,it i s t o b e not ed that th e au ricular ap p endage s
only v e ry slight ly sugge st the p erianth . In thi s c onnec t ion one may not e the
lat er Dhyan . 14,where th e h eart is c ompared to a banana blo s som, not unlike
an inverted lotu s in general shap e,and qu it e sugge st iv e of th e lung s .
The above pas sage indic at e s the po sit ion of the heart , above the nave l
and a span b elow the nec k,with qui t e su ffi ent ac c uracy
,in vi ew of the
p o et ic c harac t er o f the pa s sage . Th e ro sary of f lame , i s ,of c our se , wholly
imaginary f rom a phy sic al st andp o int,though not inappropiat e When one
c on si der s the relat ion sup po sed to have exi st ed b e twe en light , t~
‘
a .
thc ught , and heat,all of which w e re b eli eved to havdmore o r le s s c onnec ti on
with the heart . Th e art eri e s are merely ment i one d he re , and the éfie ct ive
u se d in regard t o th em,
ear i s not very explic it in exp re s sing thei r
relat i on to the heart . The art erie s hero ment ione d may p erhap s b e tho se o f
the heart i t sel f - th e c oronal art eri e s and thei r branche s , and even t h e
b ronc hial tub e s,for the wo rd na jf
'
wou ld include any tubular o rgan . But they
may Ju st a s w ell b e taken to mean the whole art eri al sy st em ,w ith whi ch the
One more general d e sc ript ion o f the h eart fo llow s,t ak er f rom a lat e
Upani sad , ( Sub . 4 ) Whi le d epe ndent in large part upon e arli er de s crip t ions ,
th e se have b een elab orat e d and ad ded to in a way that mus e s thi s Upani gadp ec uliar
uni cu e , for it shi dea s are not c op ie i el sewhere .
" In the mid st of the heart i s
a ma s s of f le sh and bloo d,a nd in it the c avit y
,the lotu s
,lilo the
op ened mani f ol d . Th ere are t en c le f t s in the heart , in which the p
dwell . When it a' 1 i s unit ed with it see s river s , c i t i e s ,
and many diver se things . When unit ed with i t se e s god s and rsi s .
When uni t ed wi th it see s Yeksa s , Rak sa sa s , and Gandharvas . When uni t ed
W ith i t see s Devaloka , Deva s , Shanda ,an d Jayant a . When uni te d with
n i t see s devalola s and wealth . When unit ed with r i t see s
vi sible , c o oke d,en j oy ed
,unen j oy ed
,t rue
,unt ru e things
,every th ing . New
each of the se t en ( c le f t s ) b ec ome s t en art e ri e s , and of each of the se there
are i s: b ranch art eri e s,in which the soul sle ep s and ma k e s sound s .
when it sle ep s in the sec ond ( stat e ,i . s . drea msle ep ) it se e s thi s
world and the o th e r world, a nd underst and s all sound s . I t i s c alled Sa
, 1‘
( th e serene soul ) . The r e pro t ec t s the bo dy round . The art e ri e s are of
g re en ,blu e ,y ellow re d,and whi t e
,and are f illed wi th blood . Now i n thi s
lo tu s c avi ty , lik e a an mani f old divi ded , Ju st as a hai r thou san df o l d
d i vi ded , are the art eri e s c all ed h i In the heart spac e , t he. su p reme
enve10 p e , the re sp lendent soul sl ee p s . When i t sle ep s i t ha s no de si re and
dreams no dream,The re are pre sent no go d s or g odworld s or sac ri fic e s o r
father or mothe r , o r re lat ion s, or relat ive s or thi e f or Brahma- slay er . It
i s a b ri lliant bo dy, 3 i t sel f . Th i s i s a fore st . Ag ai n by the
sa me rout e he run s to th e wak ing st at e ." muc h of thi s i s of c ourse bo rrowe d
f rom Erh . an d oth e r sou rc e s , but the p ic tur e on the who le i s di f f erent .
Th e li t h sec t ion f f the same Upani sadx ad ds s t ill mo re to the de s cri pt ion
of the heart .
176
ini s m us e s ti e meaning o f the wo rd prac t ically i dent iaal v i i . tfii of our
Engli sh wo rd sky , an ! in th i s sen se a 3~ ha s be en U se ! Iron th " t ins of
the gat ara thaF rihna na down . In the Amarah 0 3a i t i s L, iven as one o f th e
synonyn s of $13 3 , a nd in mo de rn Xin li i t i s on e of tho x x x . wc rds for say .
A sec ond and c lo sely relat e d moa ning ot 51T 31 i s spac e , or fih p tj spac e .
Thi s neanlng al so may be t rac ed ba zl t o th e Brihnanu s . In mo de rn Hindi
{C
I
; c i s the regular wo rd u s e i to t r a slat e the lngli sh wor l spa c e . The
e x pre s sion of th i s c onc ep t seems t o be the g eneral u se of the W o rd in the
U_an i sad s . That fih£ ; a or spac e na, c o inzi de with ou r c onc ep t ion of e ther
in a va b u o we ; i s t rue,for the Hindu philo soph e r ocul i not c onc e ive of
spac e or any thing el se a s h e re no th ingne s s . Spac e,with him
,mu st have som e
sut tort or ba se , howeve r intangible . To t h i s ext ent,then
,513 ; a i s line
othe r, but § n 5 . a i s nowhere de f ine d a s othe r i s . So the e s sent ial qual i ty o f
Ei a ; a i s that i t i s atkax spaze , or empt ; spa c e 3 tha t it i s ether, someth inb
whi z? f i ll s spac e, or ev en th e something of ‘ hich staze i s made , i s a
esaote ry mat t e r . Hen ze it se em s that wherever ros s iblfi5h 5 ;a shou ld b e
t ranslat e d spac e or omrty erase , and e thr . in the exc ept ional c a s e s . Be st
t ra nslat or s reve r se thi s,u sing ethe r wh en spa se woul i ; ive a bet ter mean i ng .
0 0
O f t en th e t r a n slat o r se ems to have noF:ple , or t o waver in hi s i dea a s to
what i s neant . Coa pars De u s sen ' s t ran slat ion s of the Urani gad s .
- Q
I n one of the lat er Up ani su ls , a i
>
I
3a i s olearl; de f ine d , in a ta s sab e
whe re th e charas t e r i st i c s of th e f ive elewotns are ginen .
" T at su ; i r. n t
( Garbha i . l)= ~L a A“ au gty5 I '
o o
4s h i m i s eu pt , ( or ho llow ) that i s spa s e , ( am
era s e,E a . n
'
a . . mu , b e creat ed t y an e xp ul si on of thetreath .
branc he s , and in eac h o f the se t ributari e s . Mait . rath er adhe re s to
0h . thoug h with c o rru pt ion s , f o r it s say s that 101 art eri e s ri se up f rom the
h ea rt , and numerou s other s go downwar d . One o f th e art e ri e s spri ngi ng f rom
th e hoart -the c h ie f one -go e s a s far as t o the ey e s . (Mait . Ch .
has already mnet ione d more loo sely that th e art eri e s p roc e ed f rom the
h eart , whi le Rang . i nf o r ms u s that one slee p s in the se h eart art e ri e s .
A lat e U pani sad , c orrup ting Prague ,say s that t en art eri e s p ro c e ed f rom ead t
o f the t en c le f t s o f the hear t ; f rom eac h of the se sp ring 72 branc he s , each
o f whic h i s sub d ivided 1000 t ime s ( Sub . 4 ) St i ll another lat e Upani sad
say s that the art e ry Sara svat i ext end s to the heart f rom the nec k . ( Yo . Ku .
126 )
The heart i s the seat o f the mind (Brh . Madh ) ran t s c ame
f rom and again returne d to the heart o f the f ir st man . ( Ait .
The heart i s o f c ou r se the‘
abo de o f all int ellig enc e . By i t one c ogni z e s
the dei ty . (Katha . 9v et . Mahan . 11) One L nOW s wi th the
The pu rx sas i s i dent i f ie d wi th knowledge and dwell s in
t he heart . (Brh . I t i s the sit e o f all knowledge . ( Brh .
The h eart i s the suppo rt Oprat i sfihfi) and v ehic l e, ( By s t an a ) o f all
t hi ng s , f o r al l t hing s re st i n it . (Brh . 4 . 1.7Mahan . of . Brahama 4 )
0h . and look upon th e heart as the s cene o f ment al ac t iv it ie s .
The mind mu st be re st rained in th e heart unt il i t c ome s to an end , that i s
t o knowledge o r liberty . ( Mai t . Natura lly,the sense s dwe ll in the
heart along wi th manas and they al l mu st be re st rained in orderfo o bt ain
Brahma . ( Qvet .F i r e s — the t erm may be t echnic al ly c on si dere d e qu ivalhnt
t o c o lo red ext en si on , are loc at ed in the heart, and the heart rec ogniz e s them .
(Brh . Faith,t ruth
,and sp eech are loc at ed in the heart . (Brh . 8
-24 ; Mahan . 25 ) Thi s re f er s t othe f ac t that nature i s vi ewed sub j ec t
ive ly , and heart i s h ere equivalent t o our word mind .
”
an s coxauonly t ran s
lat ed mi nd , ha s w i th the philo sopher s a more l imit ed func t ion , namely , the
180
t he sense s naturally re sult s f rom the i dea t hat they are ent it i e s wi th
a separat e exi s tenc e , but: the i lluminat ion o f the heart i s mo re sp ecu lativ e .
A variat ion from the ot dinary t eac hing in regard to the t ime o f
dd; slee p i s f ound in Brahma 3 , Brha j . 5 . b eg . , Where the soul i s sai d to
re t i re t o the heart in the t ime o f Th e o lder Upani sad s send i t t o
t he art e ri e s then . Parab . t ell s u s that the heart i s the abo de o f th e soul
in ra wn — dream slee p .
The heart i s the e sp ec ial abi ding plac e o f the (0h . 3 . 1x
Brh . Pracna Mund .
g?3f
lThe heart
i s Brahma , the sit e o f all being s . ( Brh . 4 . 1.78( It i s the”
?
I t i s t he v ehic le a: o f the (Erh . I t i s the h ighe st
Brahma , and the heart doe s no t de sert one who wor shi p s Brahma wit h t he
t rue knowle dge . (Brh . The heart i s the ab i ding plac e o f Brahma .
(Mai t . The go ld c olo red b i rd,t he h
fl
f i . that it,the a . a dwell s
in the h eart . (Mai t . The t z~nss or 2 2 alway s dwell s in the
h eart o f c reature s . ( Katha . Qvet . Brh . In
t he last pas sage thi s c ar" i s i d ent i f i ed W i th the mind , and i s said to be
the si z e o f a grain o f ric e or barley . I n a lat er Upani sad the de i ty in the
heart i s said t o b e the siz e o f a hai r . ( Q i ras . Gifn abi de s i n the heart .
ifiau e k lc t ~ r
(unit . The sp i rit in t he h eart i s said t o b e honey . (sin.
Mi ddle and lat e Upanisad s expre s s the same thing s , wit h thei r u sual
variatio ns . The heart i s the abidi ng p lac e o f Brahma . ( Dhyan. 12 ) Narayani
dwe ll s i n t he h eart . ( Paifig . ) The d ei ty i s t he light in the heart ( Iraq )
Light and all the deit i e s are in the heart . ( Bre hama 2 ) The dei tie s are
alway s i n t he heart . ( T ri pura 46 l i rz ; 0ara . 19 ; Ak sa; 96nd. 3 )‘
Underthe name o f T ripura . ( T ri pura .
A few anat omical re f e renc e s f rom the lat er , chi e f ly Yoga Upani sad s
may b e ment i oned her e.”he heart i s in the mid st o f t he o r
f oo d po rt i on o f the body , with i t s art erie s , li k e a lotu s f lower .
I t s caar i s the man: oakra . ( Sauhh . 3 ) The i s in i t .
Yoga id ea s begin in 9v et . The y ogin mu st turn hi s mi nd toward s hi s
h eart . (Ove t . Be re fe lec t s on the h -r c i in the eight part ed heart .
a s r (Hansa 6 ) The heartmu s t be held rig i d . (Ksu ri . 4) Th e sannyfisin
ent er s int o hi s heart ,
'whe re there i s no so rrow , h e f ixe s hi s heart in
( San . 4b . 4 ) i s to b e stop p ed in the heart in y oga , unt il
i t b ec ome s naught . ( Ksuri 3 ; Brahmav . I t mu st be k e pt c lean , so that
one may say" I am that " . ( Paing . ) The sannyasin shoul d o f f e r p rai se in hi s
own heart . (Mai t royi Th e h eart i s to f ast ene d on the highe st God in
Yoga , the d eity i s t o b e f ashioned in the heart . (Yogac . 3 )
So wi th the lat e r,more fantast ic Upani sad s . One should think on
Bari in the heart . (VEsu . He should f i ll hi s heart wi th only one thing .
( Brha j . 4 . end . ) Asc et i c i sma i s p ro duc e d in th e heart . ( Qri j . 6 . 46fi'
1n
wo r ship c onc ent rat ion i s t o b e c arri ed on in t he hear t . (Varah . Bama rah .
c onc ent rat i on give s one knowledge o f sv arlc
( 95nd. while c onc ent rat i on in the up p er part giv e s one knowledge of
‘
ahar ( 95nd. 1.g=R) The heart should be c onc ent rat ed on a single sppt
of the sky . ( 95nd. Of f e ring i s t o be made wit h thet x t x heart . (Varadot .
6 ) That o f t he Yo gi n i s t o be empt y - t hat i s , of earthly mat te r s . ( Sau bh .
The heart i s t o be f ixed in Yo ga . (Mande l . 2 ) One should remak st eady
in it . (Anna . He should not re j o ic e or so rrow in i t . ( Anna . I t i sI t i s one o f the six chi e f part s o f the body in
one o f the 18 vi t al spot s in Yoga . ( Tri q . 130; 05nd. 1. 9 )AThehr: u ;
*
should b e made in th e heart-plac e , p reparat o ry to Yoga . ( T rig . 144)
That i s,the hand s should be f ol ded over t he heart . The echo o f the
'
paq x'
should b e in it . ( Parab . beg . ) I t c o nt ain s a li ght in Yoga . ( T ri p .
As to b reath ings,air i s c au sed to ente r th e h eart . (T o , Ku .
q j . gags. The b reath i s to b e st o pp ed in i t . (Yo . Ku .
In one p o sture,th e le f t i s t o be
pu t over th e heart . (Yo . Ku . In
ano thers po sture , the chin i s plac ed ove r i t . (gags. The heart
mant ra i s ment ioned . (Ramarah . 3 . b eg . ) BEmap . 60 ) Vario u s my st ic sy llable s
The emp ty spac e ih the heart,doub tle s s the le f t vont ric al chamb e r ,
has already be en ment ioned above , und er the di scu s si on o f the word
I t i s t he sac red and e s senti al part o f the h eart,the re f o re o f man himsel f ,
and in it the deity dwell s and the mental ac t ion s pre dic at ed o f the heart
oc cur . There are several wo rd s u sed to de f ine thi s spac e,in eac h o f which
the word ent er s as an element . The se wo rd s , which wi ll all be grouped
0 1a . Re f erenc e s t o th i s heart spac e are,w i th f ew exc ept i on s
,c onf ined t o
t he old e r Upani sad s . The c onc ept remained,p erhap s in alt ered f orm , in lat er
t ime s , but the word u sed a di f f erent one , as 3 1 or anc r a . or els e the
h eart lo tus has ab so rbe d the func t ion s o f thaheart spac e .
In Ch . thi s spac e i s in th e lotu s c hamber of the body , and
c ontain s what one should seek af t er and know. Further,the spac e within th e
heart i s the sa me as the spac e wifl1ou t , t he heart,and ( in a sen se ) equal
t o it , for wi thin it dwell heaven add earth,f i re
,and wind
, sflh and moon ,
lightning and st ar s,what one po s se s se s b elow and what he doe s not po s se s s
below . ( Ch . Th i s spa c er i s i dent i f i e d with Brahma , ( Oh .
and
a s it i s in In Erh . i t i s sai d t hat the 55c ar ar"
Cu r the int ellec tual sel f,dwell s in the heart . spac e . In de ep slee p thi s
int elli gent person sei z ed the sen se s and carri e s them to the heart spac e ,
whe re th ey dwe ll . (Erh . I t i s the plac e where Indra and Vi rat meet ,
the two p erson s who dwell in th e ey e s . (Brh . Anothe r old U pani sad
c onne c t s it with i nt ell igenc e , by saying that t he 1" "
i dW ells in
it . ( Tai t .
The t reament o f thi s heart chamb er in Mai t . t end s to go o f f int o th e
f anc i ful o r po et ic st yl e , though i t b egin s in a mo re mat erial i st ic way .
A sound i s p roduc ed in thi s heart spac e whic h one may hear by st o pp ing hi s
ear s with h i s thumb s . Thi s so und may be c ompared t o seven noi se s . ( l ) Rivers
( 2 ) a b ell, ( 3 ) a braz en ve s sel
, ( 4 ) the wheel s o f a c hari ot , ( 5 ) the c reak
n
Somo think that th e soul redi de s in it ( b~"
f our f ol d i s in it . (uni t . The a sc et ic wi sh e s t o ret i re
( San. “s has only one thought in hi s ( Ni rvana) The
a light in it . ( Adhay . ; Cat . 21)
9 L i s a peculiar word ,meaning primarily t he ho llow o f a ree d , which
i s f ound in some o f the older Upanisad s . In Ch . 3 . 13v1-5 f ive o r cav
it i e s are rec ogni z e d i n th e heart, c orre spondhng_to the f ive vi t al ai r s and
f ive di l ection s . The ant eri or o r east e rn one be long s to fir
s“: sight , and
some ; the right han d o r southe rn one pert ain s to heari ng, and th e mean.
The bac k o r we st ern one i s that o f sp e ech , a nd f i r e. the le f t hand o r
no rt he rn one belong s t o ac a c i a .n ag . an c c r j cny a . Th e up pe r one i s that o f
u c an a ai r and spac e . They are the f ive men o f Brahma , and th e doo rke eper s
o f h eaven . Max Hu cller t ran slat e s the wo rd h ere by "gat e s" and Deu s sen by
" o p ening s' , th e lat t er i dent i fy ing them with t he o r path s t o the
go d s , whic h se ems doubt ful . As thi s i s a pa s sage f rom one o f t he e arl ie st
Upani sad s , when th ere was relat ively a goo d knowle dge o f the i nt e rio r o f th e
bo dy , i t i s not imp robabl e that t he se f anc i e s are ba se d on a real knowledge
o f the heart chamb er s,though an ext ra one ha s bee n ad de d t o ac c ommo dat e the
f i f th ai r and the f i f th sense . In Mait . a single i s rec o gni z e d ,
in which t he union o f the eye per son s,I ndra and Vi rat take s plac e , thd s
i dent i f y ing i t wi t h the o rdi nari ly rec ogni z e d heart spac e . Th e wo rd do e s
no t app ear lat er .
r " i s a vagu e and ind e f ini t e t erm ,which seem s t o me an primarily
mi nut e o r f in e . I t oc cur s onc e i n Ch . and several t ime s in lat e Upani sad s .
I t i s menti one d in c onnec t ion wi th the heart lotu s in Ch . and Keuri .
Yo Kn .
10 . It i s al so ment i one d i n sub . The 3 i s in it . ( tsxsxx )
I t i s é kfiga . ( Pafic ab . 35 ) I t i s the Brahmapura , and i s to b e ente red by the
r u P c i s u se d f o r thi s lo tu s,whic h i s sadd t o b e i n the b rahma -u re
anoth er name f o r the h eart . ( Panc ab . 35 ) Again , th e T U" i s the higher
stat e . (Nfirad .
i s u sed a few t ime s for -the heart lotu s . All thing s are e stab
li she d i n i t by int elligenc e, or .
‘ r '
may re f e r ei ther
t o th e heart o r i t s c avi t y . I t has ei ght pet al s . (Gopalot . 15 ) Breath i s t o be
drawn t o i t in Yoga, (Yo . Ku .
The unive r se was pro duc ed f rom that o f
Krsna . (Gopa'
lot . b eg.)
The se three wo rd s ap pear in Vi su . ,which en j oin s the wearing of the
wi n s ove r thi s plac e . One should see th e d ei t y in th e hgfay' “
an f
( T rig . 158)
‘
t S’ f
rc i s f ound only in Hait . I t i s i dent i f i ed wi th s pac e , that
i s , the dei t y . The golden puru sa of the sun ent e r s it . I n t he h eart lotu s he
eat s food , i s called time,and devour s all b eings as hi s f ood . The ei ght
leave s of the heart lot u s are the eight di rec t ion s .
ap p ear s onc e f o r the heart lot u s . The heart remain s in i t .
( Brahmab . 5 )
,L a: a‘
i s one o f the part s over whi ch th e t i lalr i s t o be wo rn .
(Vi su . ) The image o f Bhagavat i s t o b e f o rme d in i t . (Mend. One should
re f lec t on Brahma in it at the t ime o f death . ( T ri p . H . T ri pura , or
Durga , i s in it s lobe . ( T ri pura
The y ogi n s should mut t e r ( la ) ? in the hrd: r . (Varadot . 6 )
The word brahmapu ra ap pear s a f ew t ime s as a name fo r the heart .
It s u se i s rathe r po et ic , and the word i s some time s t ran slat ed bo dy . Heart ,
h owever seems to b e the b e st general rendering fo r i t . It i s f ound chi e f ly
in th e old er Upani sa d s . Brahma l ive s in it . (Oh . I t c ontain s a lu ff;
(0h . Ev ery thing i s contained in it , and t he dei ty i s the t ru e brhama
pu ra . ( Ch . The se pa s sage s c ontain simply j u st what i s said el sewhere
about th e h ea rt , so the re c an b e li tt le doubt a s t o what i s meant h e re .
A ve ry lat e Upani sad re zeat s th e st at ement that it c ontai n s th e ‘
alc r
a , that
one i qt o ent er it . ( Pafic ab . 34 ) Anoth er o ld Upani sad t hbls u s that th e
atman i s L in th e fralmar t s a . (Mund . Thi s i s repeat e d by two lat e r
one s . ( Brahma l ; ltmabodha l )
”arni lé
The exac t meaning o f k a
r
gi lfi i s not c lear . When j ive , the indivi dua l
soul i s in it , it i s in a sc et ic i sm . (Narad . 6 . b eg . ) From the c ontext , it
woul d seem t o be t he p eric arp o f th e h eart lotu s , as th i s i s a passag e simi
lar t o the a sfiadala pa s sag e in Han sa . Et ymologic al ly the weed might be tak en
t o mean the .tnhns x au ri c lec o f the heart .
The Art eri e s
A i di
Next t o the heart the art e ri e s are the mo st impo rtant of the inner
o rgan s , in the U panisad s . mhe word mo st c oumohlu u sed i s ni ai , which i s
c onnect ed w i th ra c e a reed . it se ems well to not e thi s h ere , are a s r a j?
s c arc ely anfiplac e means art ery as we underst and the t erm . I t i s very genral in
it s sc o p e , a nd may b e app li ed,and i s appli ed , t o a ny tubular orggn o f th e
bo dy . I t se ems t o include not only the art eri e s and v ei n s , but al so th e
ne rve s,and u ndoubd t e dly the wind pi pe and b ronc hial tube s . I t i s po s sible that
somet ime s ev en the sinew s may b e inc luded in i t s sc o pe . Mo st o f t he above
meani ng s are rec ogni z ed by Indian lexic ographer s, and the word xE
‘
f o r a rr
o f t o day mean s e i the r art ery,v e in
,or nerve .
19 2
r ra e i~5k1
'
5q , mak ing a to tal o f Bu t lat er Upani sad s , ap par
ent ly quot ing thi s v ery pa s sage , have but one g e t .r, so that i t i s p robab ly
thadhhe px x xngn t ext he re i s c o rrupt,and that th e real number should be
101 t ime s Ksu ri . 15-17 thu s ment ions: the art er i e s,the re being 101
c hi e f one s eac h wi th branche s , o r-ra:in5@Is while sub . 4 ha s 100
ch ie f onc e , each wi th it s subdivi sions. The 100 in st ead o f th e 101 i s
ea sily acc ount ed f o r , f or in th i s c ase the sust a i§ i s omit t ed ; it i s o f such
importahoe as to be a c las s by i t sel f . Praqna t ell s u s that in some o f the se
art e rie s v y fina move s , and in other s samana . He re , then , i s ano th er func t ion
o f the art eri e s , th e t ran spo rtat ion of th e vit al ai r s . Lat er th i s b ec ome s
their ch ie f dut y .
I n the sc heme the se art e ri e s , a s al ready ment ioned , rec e ive the
spec ial name o f ( Brh . 0 Kane. No spec ial
rea son i s given for thi s name ,unl e s s it i s that when the soul i s in them it
i s in a hap py stat e . At suc h a t ime it i s at the p inna c le of j oy . It s stat e i s
li ke that o f a y oung man o r a great king,o r a great Brahman ,
who has reac hed
th e summi t o f hap pine s s and i s re st ing .-L ata n Upaai q ada n c eeeeai aa_i ha-Z 27OOO
’
“ M M -(M m Cu . 14) Th e se
art eri e s or capi llari e s are very minut e . They are as f ine as the thou sandth
part o f a hai r . (Brh . Kaus. Bub . 4 ) As i t was mani f e s tly
impo s sible f or the phi lo so pher s t o see any thing as small as thi s , much le s s
measure it,it i s evi d ent that th i s si z e i s merely a mat t e r o f s p eculat ion .
No doubt the v ein s and art eri e s we re t rac ed as f ar as th e ey e would permit ,
and then an e stimat e made o f the i r fu rthe r subd ivi si on . It i s fu rthe r worthy
o f no t e that thi s informat ioni s prac t ic al ly c onf ined to th e early UPani sad s;
in f ac t,i t would not seem to be going t oo far t o say that thi s st at eme nt i s
due t o the Bmh . who se writ e r o r writ er s,bei ng mo st familiar with th e
sac ri f ic e,would hav e the be st c hanc e f or knowledg e along thi s line .
Ano the r very impo rtant st atement , which i s f ound in bo th our prime
t i nge than the y do under that o f a p uropean The se pas sage s are re f erre d to
i n Sub?wh ere it i s add ed that the art eri e s are f i lle d witfiblood , the
various co lo r s al so be ing ment ione d .
Adthe ci rc ulat ion o f the bbood , togethe r wi th i t s f unc t ion s , wa s not
unde r st ood by the writ er s o f the Upani sad s , thfiart e ri e s , c ontaining blood
and o the r liqui d s , a s sume a metaphy si cal ne ther than a phy sic al importanc e
in t hei r writ ings . I t has b een no ted above that they are th e plac e where the
move s about . (Brh . d c ) . It i s e sp ec ially in de ep o r dreamle s s
sle ep that thi s i s t rue , and th e soul then like s be st t he f ine art e ri e s
o r m‘
fi s . (Kaus. Oh . In Sub . 4 th e Ji nan sleep s in the art eri e s,
and i n Brahma 1 all the art erie s know t ra ns as dei ty in d eep sle ep .
Be f o re l eaving the relat ively saner Upani sad s , and ta king up the
lat e r one s , i t i s well t o note one mo re mat t e r in c onnec t ion wi th the art e r
ie s , namely the o ri gin o f the not ion o f the famou s art e ry Go ing
bac k t o Ch . we are t old that th e re 101 art e ri e s , one o f which p ene
t rat e s t o th e c rown o f th e head ; th e man who move s upward by thi s ( at death )
se c ure s immortal i ty . But by the o the r art e ri e s he depart s in all di rec t ion s .
Th i s ver se i s re p eat ed in Katha ,and wi th some variat i on s , in Mai t .
Erh . sp eak s o f an art e ry r ising feem. the heart , whic h i s t he
road f o r th e p e r son s living in the ey e s . Praqna re f e r s to thi s art ery
a s one o f the 101, but impli e s that thdsoul alway s de part s by thi s rout e ,
saying that the ‘
3 through it lead s up to th e go od wo rld by good ' 0 fk 3 :
and t o t he bad wo rl d by bad work s,and t o th e wo rld o f men by both kind s .
The name :r s urna i s not u sed unti l Mai t . Th e art e ry goe s upward ,
se rvi ng a s a passage f o r p or, and i s divi ded at the palat e Thi s la st
st at ement , unle s s dealing with someth ing imaginary , c an hardly re f e r to
anyt hing e sle t han the t rachea ,f o r th e de sc ri pt i on f it s i t exac t ly , an d
the lo o se meaning o f th e word i s quit e favo rable t o th e a i c e ptanc e o f
thi s meaning . Again,in Mait . 7. ll oc curs a pa ssage , go ing back to Erh .
( Varah . The Yogin s know th i s c i rc le - that i s,the knowle dge o f thi s
i s a help in their p rac t ic e s . ( Yo . On . 18 ) They are arranged in o rde r .
(Yo . Cu . 20 ) and con sti tut e a network whic h i s c l ean se d in Yoga, (Yo , Cu .
6 5 ) They are suppo rt ed by nou rigment . (VarEh . They are c ompo se d o f
earth , f rom among the f ive element s . (gari r . ) They are wov en together lik ea many c o lo red c loth , in the c ent e r o f wh ich i s the navel c irc le .
In these Upan isad s the charac t eri st ic funct ion o f th e art e ri e s i s
t o serve a s ai r channel s f or the body ; in fac t , in mo st o f them , the art erie s
are air pas sage s pure and simp le . Se e Varah . 05nd.
Yo . Cu . 14; T rig . b e g . 9 8 , 12 6 ; and numerous o th er pa s sage s in
c onne c t ion wi th Y o ga b reathings . In 96nd . the y are u se d by so 15 : t o
c arry nnuri shment to all the body . They may have ob st ruc tion s . (igah. 5 . 4C , 44 )
They may be af f ec t e d by drop sy . (Yo . Ku . They are sub j ec t t o impuri t e s
which are t he cau se of di sease,an d prop er b reathing and Yoga prac t ic e s
re store
one ' s health . (05nd. Yo . Cu . 9 4; gri j . Yo . Cu .
QEnd.A3 . 12 ; L iving beings are sai d t o t eam in he art e ri e s , that i s their
vit al func t ion s o p erat e in them, ( Yo . Cu . 2 6 ) and in a dream the int ellec t
move s in the f ine art erie s . (Varah . Conc ent rat ion may be c arr i ed on
( Parab . )‘J O j uu
in th em, (05nd. I t p e rvade sA
svsr ; s t
fi sw ‘ b ) M ww u w i a afin M P w d iL W o’f u/ef'
JThe zyfe ri al sy st em o f t he lat e Yoga Upanisa d s c ont ai n s remine sc enc e s
o f the early sy st em o f but i s in th e main a new devolop ement , an
enlargeme nt on the o ld i dea al ready de sc ribed . Thi s seems t o begin
wi th the i s? and l ?“al E i dea ,
f ound in we a r Keuri , two art eri e s which guard
Q C‘L a rr na on t he le f t and ri ght re spec t iv el y . Thi s not ion may in turn have
ari sen from the divi ding o f th e great art e ry « 1 t un? al ready re f erred to .
The re i s one Upani sad which ha s an art erial sy st em in which the se art erie s
do not appear ,and bo th the numb er s and func t ion s are di f f erent f rom the
o rdinary scheme s . Thi s i s sub . 11." In the neart the re i s a lump o f f le sh
and bloo d,in whi ch ther e i s the dive r sely expanded lotu s-l ike c avi t y .
In thi s ther e i s the se a ,and in thi s an env elo p e , in which th e re are f our
more bri e f ly , in many pas sage s in the lat e Yoga Upani sad s .
A li st o f th e 14 c hie f art eri e s,a s they are enumerated in vari ous
Upani sad s , i s given below .
Varah .-27 Yo . Cu . T ric . 68 -73 95nd. (Hhay
wit h
vicfiro dom
The separat e locali t i e s serv ed by th e se art eri e s will be d i sc u s sed
belew . Their main f unc t ion, as f ar as the yogin i s c onc e rned , i s their man
i pulat i on in b reathing , so that t he body may b e mad e pure , and in thi s
merit i s ac qu i re d . The i r c i rc l e or “o u r i s made impure by unc leanne ss , but
i s c lean se d by Yoga . (Yc . Cu . 9 4 )
D ‘
i l gi : ‘
p u rther ,in the reli giou s line , be f ore di sc u s sing th e in di
vi dual art e rie s,i t may b e sai d that they are mentioned loo sigy in mant ras ,
200
agiven above , i t i s the B “ o r (Advay . ; BhKv . ; 93nd.
Q rIJ.From Keuri on it i s sup po rt ed on the l e f t and right by two ether
Baubh . 3
art erie s , T and s ? re sepec t ively . (YO . Cu . 16 -19 ; gri j .
A general de sc ri pt ionpf thi s art ery i s contained in Advay . Th e e i s
the Brahma vein,in the mid st of the body . It hafithe f orm of the sun , and
shine s l ik e the moon. I t pas se s f rom the regi on o f th e anu s t o the f orward
f ontanelle . In th e mid st o f i t hal f way along it doou rse - i s th e
having memb ers l ike lotu s f ib er s , lik e a c ro re o f l i ghtning
f lashe s . By se eing it wi th the mind g one bec ome s f ree f rom sin . It s c ourse
f rom th e anu s to the t op of the h ead i s als o ment ione d in qaéd. and
Mandel . 2 ) I t is c onnec t ed w ith the (Yo . Cu . 12 ; gri j . o r wi th
the Z ur - ali rf . (Yo . Ku . Q ri j . I t i s whit e c olored . ( Saubh . a)
But thi s la st stat ement mean s nothing . It go e s t o the head , along wi th the
bac kbone . ( QrI j . I t has branch art eri e s . ( Qri j . Th e other
ch i e f art e ri e s are c lu st ered zround it . ( 95nd.
Ca st rs é ha s a t endenc y t o a s sume mental and metaphy s ic al func t i on s .
I t i s not only the chi e f art ery and the way t o rel ease , bu t it i s al so the
p rimary germ,subt il e , and th e power of Visnu . ( Qand . The same pas sage
mak e s it th e en j oy er of t ime . I t i s pure . ( Saubh . lt . 4 ) fli t t s i s ab sorb ed
by it . ( Yo . Cu . Om i s the suppo rt er in i t . (Ekak . 1) It s d eit y i s
i a . ( Qri j . I t i s likened to a bond betw e en the sun and mo on . (Yo . Eu .
It i s t o b elaf u se d in obt aining release , ( 95nd. and the soul
ri se s upward s by i t . (Yo . Cu . 3 9 )
Phy sic ally,it s sole f unc t ion c onnec t s it wi th the b reath . I t i s in
the c rane path . (Yo . Cu . 21) Fréna move s in and i s he ld in it . (Yo . Eu .
47) I t car ri e s the breath to the f ac e . ( Yo . Ku . By split ting i t the
ai r ent e rs easily . ( 95nd. I t s impuri t i e s are dried up by pro p er
breathing . ( 95nd.
Le s s i s sai d about re st raining it and manipulat ing i n a mechanic al way
than i s sai d about some o f the o ther art eri e s , though i t i s the mo st important
c ommende d of drawing in the breath by thi s no st ri l and expelling i t by the
o th er . some time s th i s p rac t ic e i s t o b e flan per f o rmed for a c e rtain number
o f t ime s , as 12 , when the f ope rat i on i s rever se d,and t he ai r i s drawn in by
oi fif alz and ex pelle d by 565 . Thi s i s somet ime s explained by the ac t of th e
yogin ' s st o pping f i r st one no st ril and t hen the o ther while in me di t at i on .
(Yo . Cu . 9 8 ; Qri j . 0544. Thi s serve s t o c l ear the n . and
f ree s them f rom di sea seand impuri ty,e sp ec ially such as are pro duc ed by th e
ai r . ( ( qand . Q ri j .
The ai r breathed b y thi s ve in reache s th e k u t gsli i t unit e s wi th
that o f and the y give ri se s t o mo t ions , and support th e body .
(gri j .-46 ) I n some ca se s i t i s t o be held by the hand s . (Yo . Ku .
A f i re i s sai d t o b urn betwe en it and p i i 8 1 ( 93nd. I t hold s the
§"
n a z between t he ey ebrow s in some Yoga prac t i c e s . (cane. Th e b reath10
i s spec ially moved in i t i n the lo tu s po sture . (Yo . Ku . 1. 19fl) I t i s not
t o b e u sezn in ob taining release —that i s th e f unc t i on of su cunn i . (Gang.
I t s d ei ty i s Bari . ( Cri j . Q ri j . and 05nd. both say
that the moon moon move s in i t,and in one pas sage it i s called the mo on
Right hast ai r pa s sage
w " i s the c o rrelat ive o f i c and what i s sai d ab out the one
i s azgid
about the other,exc ept that thi s i s the right hand pas sage in st ead
o f the l e f t . With thi s stat ement i t do e s no t s eem nec e s sary t o not e more
than the f ollowing pa s sag e s ,whic h show c harac t e ri s et i c di f f eren ce s . Pi i
i s the right hand arfi:e ry ,o r d u h l L F’E. (Yo . Ku . It i s the
and breath i s drawn int o i t to c u re weari ne s s . (Yo . Ku .
The sun move s in it . (05nd. Q rI j . It s ai r ent er s the z~v and
c ause s ec li p se s of the sun . (gri j . It s dei ty i s Vi rinc i s . ( Qri j .
The o the r re f e renc e s are paac t ic ally the same as tho se f o r i
i s one o f the 14 chie f art eri e s , onc e sai d to to back o f and
be si d e 9“
. L and go e s tb the peni s . (Bhav . 75nd. Yo . Cu .
Q ri j . 4, which ha s so many di f f e renc e s
,ha s i t go ing to the ri ght no st ril .
I t s d ei ty i s Ksu dh . ( Q rIj .
i s another o f th e chi e f v ein s , between a ?
and go e s t o all the bo dy,through the ‘
t 1 regi on . (05nd.
Qri j . 4 ; shsv . ) I t s dei t y i s vays . ( Qri j .
i s al so unde c i de d ,b eing b etween and -e _ u an
se emingly going t o the great g5nd. or to the right ear .
( Q rIj . I{:s d eity i s Pra japat i . (q 3.
~ar
: s* i s one of the 14 chi e f art e ri e s , beh ind and to the si de of
and go e s , a s one would expect ,to th e t ongue . (Bhav . Q ri j . 4; 05nd.
Under the name o f "
or “ it ext end s f rom th e nec k t o the heart , or t o
th e skull - thi s la st seeming to be a mi st ak e . (Yo . Ku . Thi s
Upani sad mak e s much u se of it in Yoga . The air moving in i t ri se s frnm the
c he st , it i s empt i e d by r c c l it s plac e i s the o ri gin o f sound or
speec h . ( Yo . Ku .-23 ) It s dei t y i s Vi rat. (gri j .
"
c I i s b etwe en 1 and“P ot i y i rvf . in the mid st o f the Kc n
‘
i .
( QrI j . 4 ) It i s one o f the 14 chi e f vein s . (Bhav . ) Pavaka i s i t s dei t y .
( q 1.
saumy a
”c an y u i s a ch ie f art ery ,
go ing t o th e right gues t t oe . ( Qand .
These i s no thing spefibi al t o not e c onc e rning the other art eri e s .
jubHE , JR ”
and go re sp ec t ively t o the peni s and the great
t o e s . ( Triq .
06
word i s u se d but onc e , and then i n c onnec t ion with th e primo rd ial egg
f rom which th e unive rse wa s sp rung . From the general c ontext o f th e
pa s sag e , and the u se o f '
u and u it woul d se em that the writ er ha s
t ran sf e rred hi s c onc ept i on t o that o f the emb ryo i n the womb , and that he
f e lt the p rimo rd ial egg wa s sup p li ed l ik e th e embry o with tubular ve s sel s .
The se b ec ame the river s Of th e eart h . ( 0h .
s cz sn. i s anal u se d but a single t ime in the Upanisad s , and then
in c onnec t ion wi th t he ? N
:“ f
. who se li c“ an i s sai d t o b e the mountains of
th e earth . (Brh . Th e wo rd me an s lung,but thi s pa s sage furni she s no
c lue to i t s meaning . Frib c st ; i s onc e use d inde f init ely , being sa id t oc ontai n "
fine . but doe s not spec i f ical ly mean lung . ( Qri j . The lung 18
probly i nc lude d in “v
i .
Liver
J
Yakrt 19 onc e u 9 9 d : along W ith in c onnec t ion wi th t he 3 3 7~
Both of th em are th e mount ai ns o f the earth . v . . iv st ( Brh .
I t i s st rang e that there i s no furth er men tion of the liver which " s“r
'
mean s .
Li ke the part s j u st ment ioned,the bladder al so i s ment ioned in but
a single Upanlsa d , unl e s s some o f the doubt f ul part s ment i one d in the late r
Upani sad s -a s —may at time s re f er t o it . wat e r i s sai d t o b e th e blad der
o f the Vaiqvanara sel f . i s al so said t o be the wealt h o f thjls se lf .
I n c on sequenc e o f wo r shi pping wat e r a s the Vai qvanara se l f , th ere i s dange r
that th e bladder may bur st . ( Ch .
08
um or t a l ar t r
I f the kundali I i s really an o rgan ,thi s would seem t o point rather t o th e
heart and lung s than t o anything el se , and o ther mat t er s have somewhat the
same leaning . St i ll,th e L unj i lI i s once plac ed in the navel region . ( Snubh. 3 )
St ill another U pani sad plac e s th e o rgan two f inge r s b elow the naval . ( QrIj .
Thi s last al so plac e s i t ab out the side s o f the ”a
”hi s simply
emphasiz e s the unreliab ili ty and unc ertaint y o f t he d e sc ripti on s to be f ound
in the lat e wri t ing s . I t should b e added that a st i ll di f f e rent wri t e r put s
the !zun ali above the f ront t eeth . ( Yo . Ru . 2 . 49 ) I t i s a very impo rt antI t i s said t o mov e o f it sel f , whic h sugge st s the lung . ( Yo . Ku .
o rg an as it suppo rt s t he b ody . (Varah . As t o it s funct ion s , the 14
chi e f v ein s originat e i n i t . (05nd. I t i s emplo yed by ”u su
n na . (Varah .
I t i s sai d t o b e in the mi d st o f the s u sum na and has mi nut e root lik e
f ib er s . It i s re splendent lik e a c ro re o f light ning f lashe s , on seeing whichT h a t
m we
the mind at tain s mclsa . sub st anc e of thi s i s rep eat ed in Mandal
2 . It c onn ect s wi th s u sunna . ( Yo . Ku . The vein " Erug i i s above and
b elow th e Iuniali . The ai r o f { c a ent er s the 1 1 zc a.li c au si ng an
ec li p se of the mo on , whi le that o f p ifigali , c au se s an ec lip se o f the sun .
(gri j . The breath al so c i rclu ate s in th e L t ndz lf . ( QrI j . 77
Yo . Ku . gag g.”f an s and at s unit ing and b ec omi ng heat ed go
t o it no rmally . ( Yo . Ku . Heat i s said to move i t . ( Qri j . I t i s
ggkt i , ( Yo . Ku . or galt i i s in i t,o r travel s in it . (Varah .
Yo . Ru . I t i s one of the eigh t f o rm s of o r at lea st c onnec t e d
wi th them . ( Qri j . Yo . Kn . It i s sai d t o b e the abode o f knowl edge .
(Bhfiv . ) Itiknows m ay : ( Yo . Ku . I t slee p s . ( Yo . Ku . I t i s sai d
t o b e th e f orm o f :m r t s . ( T ri pura All the se seem to b e 1 ma t t er s
c onnect ing i t with the heart,and so d ivi ding the func t ions o f th e lat te r
Th er e i s a ve ry f igurat ive pas sag e , which say s that it see s the
mi li k and i a s a snak e a lot us root, and tak e s it s tai l in it s mouth , b eing
po s se s se d o f the crab ra z dj rc . Thi s seem s t o b e a f igurat ive way o f
say ing that it c onne c t s the anu s wi th th e ante rio r f o ntanelle . ( Yo . Ku .
i s a part which may at some t ime s be almo st c e rt ainly i dent i f i ed
wi th the b e lly o r the st omach , but at others i s more inde f ini t e . Th e navel
i s sai d to b e in the mi d st edit ( T rio. 58 ) With the ai d o f and s pans
the p roc e s s o f di ge st ion i s c arrie d on in it . ( 95nd. separt t e s
f oo d and wat e r and j uic e s in it . ( Trio. 82 ) While the se pa s sage s would
ap ply well t o th e stoma ch , th e f ac t that th e yo gi n s had no real knowledge o f
t he st ruc ture o f the b o dy lead s to the beli e f that thi s i s simply a hy po
theti c al o rgan , devi sed t o acc ount f or c e rtain vi t al func t i on s . I t c ont ai n s
ai r , and thi s seem s to b e an impo rt ant f unc t ion . ( gang. Yo . Ku .
The last passage t ell s u s that it s diai en w ith ai r'
remove s i t s
fault s o r d o s e 1 It s di sea se s se em t o be dro p sy and enlarged
sp lee n —bo th rather c ommon in I ndi a . ( Yo , Ku .
I n the mi d st o f the t ends in living c reature s other than men and
quad rup ed s , th e are gathe red t o gethe r . ( T rig . 6 6 ) In that o f bi rd s
there 1 8 a f lame o f f i re . ( 95nd.
The i s a so rt o f f i replac e , doub tl e s s c onc eived o f t o
ac c ount f o r the heat o f t he bo dy . I t i s in the mid st o f th e b o dy , three
c o rnered i n men and like glowing ge ld . In quad rup ed s it i s quadrangular ,
in b i rd s , round . I n it s mi d st‘
i s a glowing t ongue o f f i re . I t i s in the
mi db o dy , b etween th e anus and p eni s . It iiithe h eart c engr o f animal s , and
the t c ent er o f bi rd s . (35nd. 4; Q ri j . 4; see al so . T rig .
‘s r i s pe rhap s the same a s the above . I t i s in th e i nt erio r O f
the body , and i s in it . ( Qfinq.
Th e vari ou s sec reti on s o f the bo dy,real
b e c all e d p ro duc t s . Fo llwi ng i s the li st,which
Impuri ty
Exc ret ion
Sweat
Mo i sture
T ear s
Urine
Ordure
3 ,
an
which living b ei ng s c ould be gene rat ed,h enc e one c la ss o f li f e i s known a s
mrediz j a , o r sweatborn. ( L i t . Gau d .
Mo i sture
kle do
fle da. c ome s in spams Upani sad , wh en the body i s said t o b e c ove re d with
it . I t mean s moi sture . ( Bub . 8 )
T ear s
3 8711
Aq ru , t ear s , come int o ment ion rar ely . Theqare in c lude d among the
c omp onent s o f the body (Mai t . and are no t t o b e she d b y th e sannyEsin,
sinc e one who she d s them lo se s h i s knowle dge . ( Kanthae. 3 )
Urine
mu t r s
hSc ra , or urine , i s f i r st ment i one d in Oh . where it i s sai d t o
b e p ro duc e d f rom th e c oar se element o f th e wat er one dri nk s . A lat e Upani sadx
al so t e st i f i e s that it i s p ro duc ed f rom wat e r . ( garir . ) From Mait . on i t i s
look ed on a s one of the impurit ie s, or ment ioned a s one o f the c omponent s o f
the b o dy . Narad . 95nd. The last t ell s
u s that i t c ome s thnough one o f the nine op ening s of the b ody . Th e amount o f
it in the body i s indet erminat e , b eing de pendant on the amount one eat s and
drink s . (Garbha 5 ) I t he the wo rk o f s pi ne . A line in
the lat t er sec t i on,howeve r
,t ell s u s that i t i s separat ed b y t r ans .
when it i s ob st ruc t ed di sea se ari se s . (Ye , Ku . l . 56t ) I t do e s no t af f ec t the
f i re in the b elly , (Vardh . and i s not to be e j ec t ed in th e hou se .
One o f th e f i rst e f f ec t s o f Yoga i s that only a small amount o f
t et ra i s pro duc e d in the bo dy . ( QV et . Kendal . T ri ] . 106 ; Th in
le s sening o f mi c ra and ordure mak e s an old p er son young - so it would se em
that the yogin s we re not q dmfiyGree f rom worldly thought s . ( Yo . Ou . 47)
216
r lt r
o — v
thic k , lik e a mo the r ' s f i r st milk . ( Qand . The t ouch o f it de f ile s ,
and a mant ra i s nec e s sary t o puri f y one ' s self again . One
t remble s when de f i le d wi th i t b y an ignorant p erson. (flare d . Some
a s c et ic s who move only f o r the purpo se o f evac uat i on are calle d " nguri .
( Narad .
”odhana i s onc e u se d f o r o rdure
,when it i s said that it mu st be
pe rf o rme d b ef o re t aking po st ure in Yoga . ( Trio. 9 3 ) O f c our se th e general
meaning o f the wo rd lend s it sel f t o thi s u se .
Semen
L. .
a t“ :
Semen play s no small part in the sp eculat ion s , e sp ec ially the early
one s ,of the Indi an . F o fa s i s the wo rd u sual ly f ound,and gene rally re f er s to
the male , but somet ime s t o the f emale al so . I n Erh . it i s th e quint
e s senc e c d all t hing s . Fo r the earth i s the e s senc e o f thing s in general ,
wat e r i s the e s senc e o f the earth ,plant s t he e s senc e o f wat e r , f lower s the
e s senc e o f plant s , f ruit s the e s senc e o f flower s , man th e e s senc eqdi f ruit s,
and rat e s the e s senc e o f man . Woman wa s c reat e d a s a dwelling plac e f o r it .
(Erh . I t i s the t o ga s o r b ri llianc y , c oll ec t ed f rom al l th e member s
o f the male . (Ai t . Thi s rec all s th e '
g smmvla“hoory
“o f Darwin , and
like that , wa s,no doubt , an at t empt t o explain th e p rinc i ple o f he redit y
how the chi ld c oul d re semble the f ath er,and inde ed
,how th e ovum c ould
develops into a p er f ec t being . I t i s Pra japat i,o r p roc reative fo rc e . (Erh .
I t s func t ion i s th e beget t ing o f o f f sp ring,but i t i s not nec e s sary
f o r the li f e o f one,no r i s i t th e c hi e f sen se , t hough proc reati on i s one
I t i s d e pendent on nrana , and st and s o r fal l s Wi thof the sen se s . (Erh .
-12; c f . PragOna It i s p roduc ed by a livin;
man; a dead man c an not be rep ro duc ed by it l Br} . Madh . )
L ike the sens e s , le f t the body in th e quarrel fo r supremacy,
but was obli ge d t o retu rn and ac knowledge it s in f e ri o rit y t o (Erh .
The sp ri t ab idi ng in i t i s honey . (Drh . I t i s the bo dy o f
the inward rul er , " r (Brh . 3 .7. 2 3 ) the ab i ding plac e o f the r t?
the ab so lut e . (Brh . I t i s i denti f i e d wi th Pra jfipat i , (Brh .
the y ear , (Erh . and with some . (Brh .
Not a great deal i s sai d ab out r _ . c s in the lat e r Upani sad s . having
be en b rou ght f rom th e moon,as already me nt i oned , ( Kaus. i t i s not
surp ri sing that i t should al so b e c onnec t e d with the mind i n the lat e r
Upani sad s , in vi ew o f the c onnec t i on b etwe en the moon and ag e I t was
th e f ir st thing pro duc ed f rom ‘
z n r s . (Nrsp . Brha j . De si re i s
sai d to be th e f i r st ':L J C o f th e an 17. (Nrsp . One who eat s wi thout
prai s i ng gi ve bec ome s an es t e r o r r Be t as i s not to b e e j ec t e d in the
hou se . ( Bha sma . 2 ) C‘ i s the golden r
- ‘
a s . (Ekak .~2 ) Th e d eit y i s superi or
i s u sed a f ew t ime s f o r semen , but neve r in the ol de st Ups h i
sad s . There i s a p rayer in Mahan . ( Jac ob ) that it may b e pure , and
Mait . ment ions it as part o f the b o dy . Then c ome seve ral re f erenc e s
t o i t in Sarbha . I t i s develo pe d f rom the marrow . By i t s union wi th bloo d
th e f oetu s i s develo pe d . At t ime s the wind i n the womb divi de s i t i nt o two
part s and then tw i n s are bo rn . The amount c d i t i n th e bo dy i s a
or 182 grams . (Garbha 2 -5 ) I t i s c ompo se d of wat er among the f ive elex ent s
(gari r . )
V c r y a i s twic e u se d wit h the same signi f icat ion . I t i s separate d by
( qand. and that o f the de it y c reat e s Pra j fipat i . ( Avyakta )
220
I t weigh s a yr
r s c‘ o r 728 grams . (Garbha 5 ) The lat e Yoga Upani sad s
have fanta stic not i on s . 3 10 c au se s d isease s ( Qri j . The se are cured
b y drawi ng in ai r by the t ongue an d exhaling i t by th e no se , (05nd.
o r b y th e fiull b reat hing known as a
r
1hh t l ( Yo . Ku . I t i s dri ed up by
rap i d mo ti on af t er death . (Yo . Ku .
Phleghm
“
em‘
r i s the thi rd of the humor s o f th e bo dy , being one o f i t s im
puri t i e s, (Bai t . and weighing an s éhs ; c 29 12 gram 8 . (GarbhaS)I
I t i s f ound in the Brahma art ery,
I SRA IQ ) and th e mouth . ( Yo . Ku .
l e as e i s anoth e r wo rd u se d for phle ghm . I t i s onc e di st ingui she d f rom
1“s e ize . though noth ing i s sai d t o indic at e th e di f f erenc e betwe en them .
(Nai t . I t i s th e wo rk of the ai r known as i hane i j a a . ( Qan d . 1. 4) and i s
c ompo se d of wat er . (gari r . ) By p ro per breat hing ,it i s remove d b y t he int ernal
f i re . (g5nd. Yo . ku . I t i s sai d t o dry up . (Yo , Ku
222
Embry o logy
Proc reat ion has alway s b een a my st eriou s and int e re st ing sub j ect t o
Indian spe iualator s . That a child shou ld be develope d and born,re sembling
it s parent s , was t o th em the great e st o f all mEy T , O f c ourse it was rec og
ni x ed t hat sexual c onnec t i rn was nec e s sary t o re pro duc t i on,and in a general
way the chil d i s mo re e spec ially th e o f f spring o f the f ather . He pro duc e s
the seed , while woman furni shes th e f i eld in whi ch i t i s sewn ; the c hil d so
pro duc ed e s sential ly p e rt ain s t o th e f ath er , a s th e c arry ing out o f th e anal
ogy nec e s sari ly t eache s . Thi s explain s why a man may marry a woman o f lowe r
c a st e than h im se lf , and y et have hi s chi ldren rec eive d int o ca st e . While th e se
ma tt er s ar e not dealt wi th in detai l in th e Ufiani sa d s the t reatment o f
p roc reat ion i s in ac c o rd with the general i deas o f the Hindus .
In thi s sec t i on no att empt i s amade t o quo t e every pas sage in wh ic h
p roc reat ion i s re f erre d t o,but only tho se which are the chi e f one s . Th e
pic ture will b e ap p roximat ely c omplet e,but no t ab solut ely so .
In one o f the o lde st Upani sad s , Ait . 2 . 1ff . , we f ind t hat th e sel f
o r indivi dual ex i st e d fir st a s a germ o r see d . Thi s seed i s the e s senc e gathere d
f rom all the limb s o f t he bo dy,and i s c arri e d i n the body o f the man . He
c ommi t s thi s t o t he woman, and thi s i s the f i r st b irth o f th e ind i vi dual .
I t now b ec ome s as simi lat e d t o her, bed cming as i f one o f h er own limb s ,
henc e she i s not in j ured by it . She nouri she s the child wi thin her , and in
due t ime b ri ngs i t t o b i rth,thi s b eing the sec ond b i rt h o f the individual .
From Ai t . it i s to b e a ssumed that i n no rmal c ase s the soul ent er s
the bo dy throught th e ant erio r f ontanelle,lat e r well known as the b r .laa
Tn Erh . the ac t o f c oi t ion i s loo ke d on as a sac ri f i c e , and trac e d
back t o Pra japati . Th e variou s o rgan s and part s o f the body c onc e rne d in
c o i t i on are ligfie d t o var iou s thingsPse d in the sac ri f ic e . The be st sort o f
woman i s one rec ent ly bathe d, and suc h a one the man i s to ap p roac h . I f
she should b e unwilling to c on sent t o him,he i s to b ri b e her with pre sent s ,
824
Emb ryology
hi s f ive f ol d per cept ive facult y unders tand s smell,ta st e
, dc . Le t t er by let t e r
h e think s on the wo rd o r; when he under stand s th i s one syl labl e , the 8
n i l l and the 16 1 c ome int o the bo dy of th e l ivi ng one .
By the mo th er s eating and drink ing,and the c onnec t ion o f the art ery
c o rd , “r ina inc rease s . In th e ninth month the zigzze
i s f ille d wi th all the
c harac t e ri st ic s and all the in st rument s o f knowledge ; h e remember s hi s
f onne r bi rth s , an d att ain s goo d and evil work s . In thi s month the c hild i s
se i z e d w ith great rain at the doo r of the womb , and i s bo rn at thi s t ime ,
b eing caused b y thi s pain t o f o rget all it s p revi ou s b irth s .
Garbha 2 al so t e ll s us that the emb ry o i s f orme d by a uni on of seme n
and bloo d .
Emb ry o
ga:bha
a r bha i s the word generally used for the f oetu s . It li e s in th e womb
nine o r t en month s . ( Ch . It i s produc e d by the dei t i e s o f f e ri ng semen
wi th woman as the al tar . ( Ch . I n a my stical pa ssage,th e g a rbhs i s
sai d to be dep endent on the sun when he i s b etween md dday and the af t ernoon .
( 0h . Th e c harms i n c onnec t i on w i th the e mbryo i n Brh . have al ready
be en ment ione d . Th e embry o some time s de si re s to k ill the mo th er . (0 . B .
Bi rth i s alluded to a s the falling o f the emb ryo . (Yaj . 15 )
Cho rion
Jaray u i s app li ed t o the slough of a se rp ent as well as to th e out e r
memb rane enveloping th e embry o . I t i s onc e ment i oned in a charm . (Brh . 6-4-2 3 )
That o f h i r
ang c g f
r hk : b ecame the nount ai ns o f th e world . ( Ch , Th e
muni should not b e angry with anything that i s bo rn f rom thug j a T A‘u . ( Harad .
22 8
“AMai t .
-15 } draw s out a lengthened pa s sgae t reat ing f o od in a
my sti c al and spi ritual i z ing way . Without go ing too much int o det ai l ,it may
b e said that the eat ing o f f oo d i s here v iewed as a f o rm o f wo r shi p . It i s a
sac ri f ic e , and f ood i s o6 fere d upon th e alt ar o f the per son . The c onnec t ion
h inge s on th e n ec e s sit y o f rart ak ing o f f ood i n o rder t o su stain l i f e and the
o p erat ion s o f th e mental powe rs . All c reature s run about day and ni ght in
o rd er t o c atch f oo d . The sun himsel f tak e s f oo d wi th hi s rays,and shine s
by means o f f oo d . Th e friga ‘
s dige st when sp ri nk led wi th f oo d ; f i re f lare s
up when i t i s furni shed wi th f o od ; the univer se wa s made by Brehmfi de s iriou s
o f f o o d . Food i s f urt he rmo re i d ent i f i e d wi th the bod y o f the all su p port ig g
Vi snu , and i t s e s sense i s prér a . I t i s the c au se o f all things . I t i s c om
p o sed o f the three quali t ie s - guga“s — and semen
,nat ure
,and the world are all
f oo d . In a mo re f igurat ive sen se,all the ob j ec t iv e world b ec ome s f ood f o r th e
sen se s . And as all thinffa re bo rn f rom f oo d , they all return to i t when they
di e . Wh en vi ewed in th i s my st ic al light,in wh ich eat ing has bec ome a sac
ri fic e , part ak ing o f f o od mu st b e ac c o rd i ng to a ri tual . who mouth mu st b e
c le a nsed w i th wat er be‘f o re eat i ng,th e s c ene
’s mu st be ado re d , the f oo d
partaken o f in si lenc e,and the mou th again ni x ed ; rin se d
,af t er which the
wo r ship e r medit at e s in si lenc e,i dent i f yi ng f re d with the Vaicvanara sel f .
Some o f th e se i deas app ear in the o lde r Upani sad s , but are not t reat ed as
fully as he re . Th e same Upani sad ,a l it t le f arthe r on , i dent i f ie s
f o od with one o f the mani f e stat i on s of Brahma,add ing that zworshi p i s c arri ed
on by hh:} owing food and drink into the mouth,wh ich i s the ah a
v cni v i f ire .
In Kaus. the dy ing f ath er t ran sf er s,by a mant ra , f o od , o r hi s
powe r over f ood,t ori s son . The de sire f o r f oo d and dr1nk ,
znc ording t o the
explanat ion o f Oh . i s cau sed by t he robb ing o f the elehont s in th e
bod y ; wat er tak e s away f oo d,and wate r i s tak en away by heat ; henc e the
app et i t e s .
L at er Upanisad s are in sub s tant ial agreement with th e o lde r one s in
230
Heat o f Bo dy
C lo sely relat ed t o the func t ion o f di ge st ion i s the bo di ly h eat , as
ha s already been shown . A li t t le mo re may added t o the sub j ec t o f heat . I t i s
u sually t reat ed in a my st ical way,and ve ry f requently c onnec t ed with one or
mo re o f the ext e rnal sac ri f ic ial f i re s,so that i t s di scus sion f rom a phy si
ologi cal standpczg doe s no t y ie ld much . The bo di ly heat i s pro duc e d between
p r ime and agasa , f igured as scma ve s si ls ,"
I . { su and a n cc r; 1 . It i s called
Vai cvanara , and i s the inward e rru 3a . It di ge st s f ood , and mak e s a no i se
whic h one may hear by st c j ping hi s ear s wi th hi s f inge rs . A p e r son dy ing
do e s no t hear thi s noi se . (Erh . Ch . Mai t . In thi s c onnec t ion
one should remembe r that soun d i sa
. charac t eri st ic of f i re , and that i t
c ont inually re p eat s , " T hL J Q '
chugu " .
I t i s har dly nec e s sary t o re f er t o one ' s b eing bo rn f rom and ret urn ing
to agni af t er death . ( Ch . But we may not e the di f f erent f i re s wh ich
are i n the bo dy . Acc o rding t o Ga rbha 4 th ere are three f i re s which l i e ,
cri yan t i in t he bo dy
,henc e i t i s called sat i re . Th e se th ree f i re s are
the j L EnEgni . o r knowledge f i re,the dareanc gni , o r see ing f i re , and th e
f sfi‘
égn ; o r vi sc eral f i re . The se thre e f i re s re s p ec t iv ely give k nowle dge o f
goo d and evi l workd , see forms , and di ge st f oo d . They are loc at ed in thre e
plac e s; in the mouth as the i har
eni j c ,in the b elly as the gi rL e p c
'
y a and
in the heart as the dai
siga f i re s . Pranag . 2 vari e s thi s a lit t le . The
f firya f i re , thou san d- rayed,dwell s in the head , the ia r
cana f i re , as the
F ’avaniy a , in th e mouth
,the hal fmo on shaped c ari r a f i re , as the i’
. si n.
-“
r h c p e t ya . in the navel , and dige st sJin the heart ,
an d th e ac cth c f i re,the
what i s eat en and drunk . Thi s f i re in th e belly i s not af f ec t e d by exc rement
and uri ne -i t kee p s on burning . (VarEh . In genral ,the heat o f the
bo dy i s p ro duc ed by the f i re in the h eart,which i s a comb ine d phy sio lo gical
and my st ic al i dea . (Hahan .
Th e rath er pu z z l ing Vai j vanara f i re i s ment ione d in th e Upani sad s ,
but no t muc h light i s thrown on i t . Th e chi e f pa s sage s are Erh . Ch .
name
t ast e
f o rm
sound
de si re
wo rk
t ouc h
A one evi dent s means sme ll h e re,though one mu st admit that the u se
of th e word i s peculiar .P rana as the o rgan o f smell al so seem s a li t t le
st range,but i s a mo re natural u se o f on e o f tho breath s . I t Will be not e d
fl
that tast e,work and t ouch have been adde d to the li st s in Oh .
‘f /tlLLa A L l afiv a M W M ‘J'
Anothe r , though an inf o rmal,li st f ound in thi s same Upani sad i s
more c omplet e . (Brh . rep eat e do f
Organh3 8ense
skin
t ongue
no se
ey e
ear
mind
heart
t s i k han d s
f e et
spe eh
anu s
Ob j ec t
t ouch
ta st e
smell
f o rm
sound
pe rc ept s
knowledge
wo rk s
mov ement
Ve da s ( knowle dg e )
plea sure
evac uat ion
I n thi s early pas sage all t en o f th e sen se s , as ord inari ly de f in e d ,
2 36
se ems t o reoogni le 14 sen se s, as i t well may in v i ew o f it s more or le s s
o riginal nature i n seve ral line s ,
c o rrelat ion s , rath e r t oo vague t o help xmm much has
Sense Ob j ec t Fi eld o r Vital Air
Organ Dei ty
ly e Sig ht
Ear hearing
no se smell eart h
t ongu e t ast e Varuna (wate r ) u iéno
sk in t ouch ai r
speech speaking fi re ( zgni )
han d t ak ing Indra
f o ot going Vi snu
anu s Evac uat ion Mrt yu
p eni s p lea sure Pra japat i
“minding" Chandra
ego i sm Rudra
Kes t rajna
In p reparing thi s sch eme , one set o f
not been inc lude d .
I t will b e not ic e d that the above li st c ontain s the f iv e knowl edgefac ul ti e s
se snse s , follwe d by th e f ive ac t i on sense s and th e f our qualities Which
c omb ine to mak e up what we know as min d . The f unc t ion s are th e one s normally
rec ogni z ed as p ert aining t o th e sen se s .I C1t y a i
brill ianc yan d Y c r v r c are sub
st i tut e d f o r th e ir p rac tic al synonyms , t i t s ; spac e , and wat er , in th e tabl e
of element s . In o rde r to c omplet e thi s t able , c ert ain dei ti e s are calle d
in . Some of the i r c o rr elat ion s are c om mon ,even f rom early t ime s , e sp ec ially
that o f mama s and th e moon. Bppec h and f i re , evacuat ion and death , p roc reati on
and Prajapat i , are p ret ty well c onnec t ed . Th e c o rr elation s of th e v it al ai r s
are not only unu sual,but pre sent some ai r s not ment ioned ale el sewh ere ,
mak ing a to tal li st o f 14 o f them . Thi s li st i s f oun d in Sub . 5 al so .
th ei r ac knowle dgment o f r i ; c as the chi e f,i n an old an d several t ime s
rep eat e d fable . (srh . Ch . Kane. Praqna As t o thei r
being employed by th e dei t ie s i n th ei r c on f lic t s wi th the a suras , and
b eing p i erc ed wi th evil , which al so lead t o the ac knowle dgment o f th e eu
p remec y o f pr ime . see the re f erenc e s t o the di f f e rent part s o f the bo dy
whic h are o rgan s o f sen se .
Thei r subo rd i na ti on t o th e an 1an i s anpha s i z e d by anoth er expr e s sion ,
when th ey are sai d t o b e the ho r se s f o r i t . ( Katha . Mait . divi de s
th e func t i rns o f the sen se s,mak ing the f ive ac t i on sens e s the ho r se s , while
the f ive knowle dge sen se s are the line s . ChEg . and Paing . al so mak e th e
sens e s the ho r se in the f igu rat ive chari ot . Again,th e knowle dge sen se s are
th e sac ri f ic ial ve s sel s at the f igurat ive bo dy sac ri f ic e,and the wo rk
sen se s the hav i s . ( G arbha 5; Pranag . 4 ) The i r sub j ec t iowt o sp i ri tual f o rc e s
i s emphasi z ed in ano ther way Wh en the dy ing f athe r,by ”man s o f mant ra s ,
t ran s f e r s h i s power s of sense to h i s son . ( Kane.
while the sen se s arr ment ioned many t ime s in ad di t ion t o the re f e renc e s
quo t e d , only lit t le o f imp o rt anc e i s t o b e no t ed . Th e ch ie f thing remai ning
i d th e sub j ec t ion o f the sen se s to the c ont emplat ive fac ulty,wh ich i s urged
numerou s t ime s . Katha . t ee ~he e that when the f iv e sen se s , along Wi th
“sa c s remain f i xe d o r st ead fast
,thi s i s the high e st st at e o f man . So al so
Mai t . And in a gene ral way,we may quot e among other pa s sage s in regard
t o the nec e s sit y o f c onquering o r c ont rolling the sen se s , Hai t . 6 . l9 -21; Hand.
throughout ; 05nd. Trig . 28, do; Q ri j . f f ; Anna . 3 ; Pkak s.
A single o ther po int i s that bo th clas se s o f sense s go t o mak e up the
li r c a cari ra . ( QErIr . )
fuel11: in the bo dy sac ri f ic e . ( Oh . At deat h it s t
goe s t o the ey e ,
and i t s to Th i s i s in:}as sage giving the o rder in wh ich th e
sen se s fail at the time o f death .
Kaus. has several more pas sage s in regard to th e voic e . On e may live
wi thout i t , but i s dumb ; i t i s no t e s sent ial t o l i f e,though u se ful . q s
e sp ec ial f unc t ion i s the at taining,o r grasping of name s
,an i dea o f t en not
with . I t i s an in st rument o f int e lligenc e or c by who se ai d i t perfomr s
the se f unc t ion s , and wi thout whic h i t c an not grasp name s . ( Kane.-7)
I n ad di t ion t o it s b eing the fuel in th e f i gurat ive sac ri f ic e , as
not e d in Ch . , it i s al so i den ti f i ed with th e h ot s“. (MahEn .
Or , when the body i s c o nsi dered as a chari ot , vac i s the rat t l e o f the
veh ic le -not a bad c ompari son . ( Ghag ) .
Naturally the chi e f ref e renc e s in the lat er Upani sad s re f er t o th e
re st raining o f the voic e . Thi s begin s in Mai t . and i s o f t en re p eat ed .
( Mandel . NErad . 5 . &c ) Thi s i s b ecau se i t i s one o f the in st rument s
b y which a f f lic t ion , bene f it,the f t
, do . are p e rf o rme d . ( 96nd. I f u se d
by the a s zet is , it should b e pure ; a f al se one vio lat e s the sev en door s .
(Hi re d .
Y
feigoc t ion o f the vo ic e i s at tai ned by rep eat ing c e rt ain
mant ras , a s Da" i . ( Devi ; Maya . ) Some ob j ec t s c an not b e attained by
t he v oic e . ( Anna . I t b ec ome s pe r f ec t through yoga prac t ic e s . ( Trig .
Al so eloquent . (96 nd. I t i s loc at e d in the regi on o f the
“o oEla o r skull . ( Saubh . end . ) I t i s c onnec t e d with the element eart h .
( Trig . b eg . That o f the dead i s rep ro duc ed wi th the 8 th p ing: o f the t en
o f f e red . ( Pinda . 7)
H3 1 . c o pulat ion, i s o f c our se vi ewe d as an ac t ion o f sense , as
al ready ment ione d . T hi s gives b i rt h t o the body . (Mai t .P i t a shenad be
pe rf o rme d du ri ng the nigh t ; per-freeing it by day wast e s the b reath . ( Praqna
To o much o f ch vn: produz e s di sea se . ( Yo . Ku . I t ari se s f rom
the el ement fire . (garIr ,
242
i t s return it f ound the i o dy still alive,and ha d to ac knowledge it s in f er~
iori t y t o e ra: dc . ) I nfant s are sai l no t t o have any ( d6 . )
I t s c onnec t i on with p i s several t ime s ment iored . ,but thi s relat i on
i s variou sl y de sc rib ed , partly owi ng to the w ri t er s ' c onc e pt ionfif p
By uni on with dy au s p ro duc e s pranc . (Erh . Together wi th th e
“rana 'r i t i s woven on Brahma . (Rand. U sual ly i t i s in f eri or t o
prcna . I t stan ds becau se prura doe s . (Erh . I t i s in f erio r to prana .
( Kaus. I t i s the e s senc e o f c rir z .‘Hait . Similarl y a lat er writ er
say s i t i s pro duc ed and sup po rt e d by means o f c r 5 . a . ( G . B . In
sle ep and death it merge s int o s r
cn (Oh . Kaus.
Oh . Onc e i t i s sai d that the bo dy o f p dwell s in it . ( Pracna
I t i s uni t e d wi th p ram: in th e highe st Yoga. ( Tri o . 16 3 ) In the b reathing s
i t i s u se d to re st rain th e e réhs’
s . (qEnd. l .7. 37, 44
I n early t ime s i t i s the chi e f of the sen se s - to whom they sa k e thei r
return s as it were . p e r one see s and hear s with c an (Brh . Hahan .
do ) I t i s supe ri o r to the sense s . ( Katha . I t remzhs the ir
c ont roll er in Yoga t ime s . (gri j . When th e sen se s are not
c ont rolled by the mind they are li ke ungoverne d ho r se s,but are lik e well
t rai ned ho r se s wh en th ey are sub j ec t e d t o i t . ( Katha . They ret i re
int o the mind i n -'
x5 sle ep — henc e one dreamdrhen . Pracna f f . )
The c onn ec t i on o f mama s wit h sp e ech i s o f t en not ed . I t i s c onsi dred
sup erio r t o sp eech . ( Ch . Katha . I t i s sai d t o c ontai n speech .
(Erh . Mach . ) In the p ro duc t ion o f sp eech it st i r s up the f i re o f th e
bo dy , wh ich move s the che st and generat e s sound . (Hait .
The high p o sit ion o f rana i s ind ic at e d by sev eral f igure s . I t i s l ike
a vehic l e y ok ed w ith ev il ho rse d -the sen se s~ -which re q u ire re st raining .
( Qve t . I n a similar f igur e i t i s th e drive r o f the se st ee d s for the
b ene f it o f the it ’
zr . (Hai t . I t i s the chariot re in , b y which the-
Etm . .
rule s the se st ee d s . ( Katha . It i s th e chario t harne s s . ( Paifig . ) It i s
the chariot i t sel f,in wh ich the i bna n ri de s . ( Paanfig . 4 ) Under the f igure o f
244
r
f o r in sani ty o r ment al weakne s s ( of . G'
t X m V“b W V a
Sugge st that th i s c onn ec t ion was exi st ent even in primit ive Indo -turOpean
t ime s .
In regard to o th er thingfikonnec t e d with mind,as they relat e to the
b ody , such f or inst anc e a s c:: which rul e s hhe variou s o rgan s o f sense ,
enough has been sai d in th e di sc u s s ion of theheve ral sen se s and part s o f the
b o dy for the purpo se o f thi s t reat i se .
f en c e
Th e c on si d erat ion o f the i s a somewhat c or plic at ed mat t er ,
owing in part to the fac t the n rfre ha s vari ous meaning s , even, at t ime s
,
in a single Upani sad , and al so to the fac t that the re are some un set t led
mat t ers in regard t o j u st what the vari ous memebe rs o f the n se rie s
are . If thi s last p o int were the sole one t o be dec i ded he re,p erhap s the
be st way o f di scu s sing the que s ti on qould be to begin wi th the mode rn u sage
o f the vari ou s wo rd s , and trac e them bac kward s to the ir f i r st u se in
the l it e rature o f Sansri t writ er s . But on th e whole i t wi ll p robably suit
our purpo se b et t e r t o t reat the sub j ec t chronologic ally , a s othe r mat t e r s
have been t reate d .
The p rimarymeaning of c r ap : f rom the c ompounded Jhr , t o b reath e ,
seems t o mean simply b reath . A noun a g e i s al so f ound i n the Upanisad s , but
i n each case there i s something wh ich mak e s it doubt ful whethe r i t i s a real
ge l s 2a u f mfl4 1eu x i / L A ir fb " L ' 3
élgl L bf
worn in a c tual u s
e:Ir: i s f ound onc e
, B .V . and se em s a likely
t o be th e bas e of th e cr Ej a sy st em3\
Bu t a s the p re sent t reati s e i s c onf ined
t o the Upanisad s , i t i s hardly worth whi le t o ent er int o a di scu s si on o f
out si de Ias sag e s . The c orrelat i on and ident i f icat i on o f breath with li f e i s
mo st natural and has been done in many nat ion s ; henc e it i s j u st what w e
would expec t wh en we f ind 075 3 3 in many ca se s meaning li f e , or the li f e
p rinc i pl e . Thi s thought nec e s si tat e s the i dent i f ic at i on of ar
ena wi th the
soul in many schoo l s o f t hought, and ag
in)with
th e d ei ty . Finally , b rain :
i s us ed to re f er t o the sen se s,at a t ime when th ere wa s no sp ec ial word
t o indicat e then . Thi s was no doub t due t o the importanc e o f the sen se s
t o the li f e and r i nd, and may have be en in f luenc ed b y ano ther early word f o r
t he sen se s or‘
t‘
r as a sen se need not be di scu s sed here ,
as the s en se s are t reat ed el s ewhere,whi le th e metaphy sic al c onnec t i on s
are no t wi thin our sc o pe . The remaining sub j ec t i s th e breath-b ran:
Star ting Wi th the single in the R . V . we f ind a li st o f f iv e
s p ec i f ic b reath s menti oned i n the lat er Samhi ta s and thei r ad j unc t s . Some
ofl i o- the se b reath s are not o f t en menti oned in thi s early lit e rature , but
b reath in the upp er part of the body . in the Upanisad s , on the
othe r hand , seem s t o mean t o mani pulat e and thi s may b e done by
e ither in or outbreathing ,t N W u 70h W W ”C u ’w '
Th e develo p ement o f a serie s o f breath s out o f the original nr 7n'
while in part p ri o r t o the Upanisad s , may pe rhaps be under sto od f rom th em .
Af t er the o ri ginal 0 ] ; :ar : se em s to n have b een the next member
added . Thi s may b e in f erred f rom th e fac t that the se two are the breath s
mo st ment i one d , and the re f ore c on sidered the mo st impo rt ant . We f ind f o r
in stanc e that th ey are e s sent ial t o li f e,i n a pa s sage where no c hhor breath
i s ment ioned . (Erh . Thi s i s pa ssage i s one where i x a charm i s u sed
t o take away a man ' s a: and r efna , and he depart s f rom thi s world .
I n th e o pinion o f the wri t er,thi s re f e r s t o the b reath in the upp er and
low er part s of t he bo dy,as c onc eived by the Hindu . Reasons f o r th i s O pini on
will be given lat er . Another and lat er pas sage read s , ”He lead s up the
y rBflt g b he th row s thax ’a~v at i )the at gfi a in t he op po si t e di rec t i on ’
n
Al l the Bay e s wor shi p the dwarf seat ed in the mi d st ." (Katha , The
re f e renc e seem s t o b e to th e li f e p rinc i ple or deit y , which seat e d in the
heart , o p erat e s the p rar a above him and the as below him .
Th e th ird to b e added would logically seem t o be " wane , as explained in
Oh . Te xAng lic i ze the verb s wh ich seem to be simply
d enominat ive s , the pas sage would b e t ranslat e d , "That which b rzn r'
i s wri t s . that which acEna’
a' E“ i s a p ar t : the union fs a cf o f the
two ,p ranv and sam e
,i s vy ina ,
" ”w ins i s furthe r id ent i f i ed wit h sp e ec h ,
and we are t ol d t hat wh en we speak o r sing i 1 we do not exerc i se either o f
the se two b reath s . Too much st re s s should not be p lac ed on the i dent i f icat ion
o f vvéna with sp eech,though th e fac t that the ai r which operat ed th e vocal
c o rd s c ome s neithe r f rom the head nor the bowel s,but f rom a p o int b etw een
the no se and the navel , the locali t i e s o f nrs~
and avzn u
, would be su f f ic i ent
ground s f o r the wri t er ' s i dent i f y ing v v cnc wi th sp e ec h , and would be the mo st
c.
_“ v
Th e five breath s are al so rec ogniz e d in Erh . The i s sai d
in san' There i s nothing t o be gained h ere in regard t o th e b reath s o r
their func t ion s; the main thing t o b e not ic e d i s that they are enume rate d in
thei r u su sal orde r . In Erh . f ive nrari
s are ment i oned which go t o the
ea st , south , we st , north,and downward . The pa s sage i s an ob scure one , and
relat e s t o the Siv an .
In Oh .-5 five or?na s are c o rrelat ed t o f ive cavit i e s o r SU Sl S
in the heart . Th e li st i s as f o llow s .
c ' \
Forward ( p rim)
A
up pe r ( L ”Cans wind ( t ouc h )
Ab out all that c an b e gained f rom thi s table o f fantiful c o rrelat i on s
i s that Ch . rec ogni ze s the f ive b reath s a s well a s Bgbl . and that the
b reath s are enumerat ed i n a di f f e rent o rder f rom what th ey ar e in Brh .
Thi s same o rder i s f ollowe d in Oh . where a v ery simi lar tab le
o f c o rrelat i on s i s given
ey e , sun , heav en
ea; ,moon di rec t ion s , { di c e
t ongue,f ire , earth .
“sn a g . t
e r n li ght ning .
wind,spac e s ea ) all under them .
Whi le some int ere st ing things may be deduc ed f rom the se tab le s , noth ing
po rt ant c an be d erived .
Tai t . name s the f ive breathe in thei r u sual o rd e r , but doe s no t
d e f ine t hei r func t i on s . Thei r locali t i e s are c learly set f o rt h f o r the f i r st
a i s the one omi t t ed -mak e up the a Eac h o f the se i s ac c ompaniol by
it s verb , u sed w ith denomi nat iv e f orc e . Nothing sp ec i al i s to he gai ned
f rom thi s pa ssage . I n Tai t . and are i dent i f i ed re
spec tively wi th h : . and i Th e same threee . breaths are sai d t o
mak e up an inner man , who se shap e i s that o f the out er man . P r i s the h ead
the right si de , and the le f t . ( Tai t . Agai n in Mai t .
th e se same three are sai d t o mak e up the b reath-b o dy . From thi s i t
may b e not ed that even when the f ive breabhs are all rec ogni z ed , and th ei r
f unc t ion s set f o rt h , th e se thre e are th e b reath s pseeminently .
In Pradna th e f ol lowing c orrelat io n s are f ound . -:h
regulat e sthe othe r b reath s . i s the reward o f the sac ri f ic e . I n Mai t .
" "
a na . ana . zzz an e and z are b ric k s in th e
l l
f i re altar ,
whenc e it has head , si de s , c ent er, and tai l .
I n tak ing up the separat e b reath s,orig the chi e f one , wi ll b e
re se rved t i ll the la st , and apa aa. wil4be f i r st c on si dere d . I t has al ready
b een stat e d that i n the early Upani sad s i s the b reat h in the upper part
o f the b o dy -tho f ore-b reath and s pa ns the b reath in the lower part o f the
b o dy -the o f f —b reath . There i s but one pa s sage in th e UPani sad s which will
no t bear th i s meaning,and it will b e di scu s se d b elow . Th e pas sage in Katha
ha s already b een quot e d , wh ere the deit y o r a . i s rep re sent ed as sit ti ng
in the c ent e r, ( o f the bo dy ) sending y
raqs up and spa
n : down . Thi s same
sec t ion t el l s u s that one neither l ive s o r di e s through the s e b reat h s , but
by something e l se i n whic h th e y rep o se -evi dent ly to c ont radic t the c ommon
mat erial i st ic b el i e f o f r ‘ r ‘
and :t § i : b eing the ba si s o f l i f e . Thi s view o f
a tana i s qui t e ea sy to under st and . In no rmal b reathing the mu s c le s o f the
c he st are tho se whi ch are chi e f ly af f ec t ed . Thi s t hen i s th e locali t y o f the
o rdinary b reath o r p rana . But i f one c ont rac t s f o rc ib ly hi s abdominal part s
af t er the ordinary b reath has b e en f o rc e d out , a lit t le more b reath may b e
T he Prfira c
,— flpan
Allusi on ha s b ee n made to a pas sage whore au r a doe s not mean the ai r
in the abdominal region s . Thi s i s Erh . whichi s relied on by Deu ssen t
as hi s chi e f pas sage t o p rove that apina means inb reathing . The pas sage i s
a s f ollow s .F ranc
“nan rnnt i grfihcna gzh i to
‘
pir eaa hi s ge rolam
j i g rrrt i . Thi s i s but one o f e ight f ormula s in wh ich the eight gra sp er s
o r sen se fadult ie s are c orrelat e d with their ovorg raspers or ob j ec t s,that i s
p rana , j i hva , c ah suc r o tra , “anu s . ha st en , and t r ac , are c oup led
re spec t ively with gandha . ncma ni .
ru e ? f rya , q c bda ,
l .armar , and sparga .
The sec ond of the se fommulas , which s e same ; mut an i s f ol lowe d by all
t he sub sequent one s i s as f o llow s . VE:"
S i g rahah, 3 a nams t ; g ranog a‘
rn i zo ,
vc c a hi u s m any abhi vads t i . Boethlingk amends th e f i r st o f th e f ormula s ,
quot e d above to c on f orm wi th th e f o llowing seven,reading as f o llow s . Pr cno
I t i s di f f icult to see how one c an avo id f ollowing Boethlingk . Th e ground s
for the emendat i on are ent i rely apart f rom the meaning o f apih a . I t i s im
perat ively d emanded by the model of th e f ormulas,for it i s sc arc ely con
c e ivable t hat in such a case a new word should b e int roduc e d in th e mi d st of
a single f orm ula . Koreover , a s the pas sage st and s,th e f ormula make s at ana
mean both p ower of smell and o do r,which isnot only non sense , but i s
again out of harmony with th e f o rmula; it has t o do dut y b oth as graha and
at i griha . Bous son ( Phil . o f Upah . png . edit i on p . 278) admi t s that i t i s
a mi stak e,but think s it i s very ol d one
, the not due t o th e o ri ginal autho r .
He think s it c ould not have remained all the se year s unle s s oeana really
meant inbreathing . But Qafilara' s c omment ary ex rlai ns th e work ings o f th e Hi ndu
mind in regard to such que st ion s much mo re c learly than any amount o f theor
is ing and sp ec ulati on . T obegi n with gafikara has what t o h im i s an i n sp ire d
t ext whi ch h e c an no t amend , and which he mu st exp lain. He do e s i t by a so rt
o f double metaph or . Ap inc . h e say s i s alway s ac c ompani ed by o dor; it carrie s
iado r Along'
with i t .Henc e , odo r may be calle d c oi ns . now , by an impli ed
Lit tl e i s t o b e gleaned f rom the earli e r Upani sad s re sp ec ti ng ea
in addi t ion to what ha s al ready been sai d , the c hi e f th ing be ing that cw .n
Li s i n th e mid st o f the body and carri e s up the offeéifcod t og ether -di st ri but e s
inn a punning pas sage ,i t . ( Praqna again it i s said to lead equally th e o f f ering s o f in and out
b reat hing and henc e i s c alled samana . gl u t: L . a '
w._u i a s s . It should b e mark ed that in th i s pa s sage p r ong
s
p ana are not u sed f or the in and out breath s,but u zch
"
a sa and niac"
a sc .
n b
( Pracna
Not hing el se i s t o be sai d in regard t o s cant a s de sc rib ed in the
o l der Upani sad s .
As already stat ed,p ri na i s the chi e f and mo st imp ort ant o f the b reath s ,
Th e word i s not only u sed in the narrow sen se o f ai r in a pp ec ial part of the
bo dy , but inc lude s all the breath s at t ime s . I n f ac t it may do thi s at any
moment and in the m id st of any so rt of di scu s sion . I t may b e t he li f e p rinc i
pl e o r the soul . sin i s f requently ident i f i ed wit h the de it y , in a manner
which seem s t o mak e praé; inc lude b reath,spi ri t , and mind . (Eth .
Tait . ff . ; Kaus. Kenn . I t i s the
same as Indra and li f e . ( Kaus. I t i s Vi snu . (Mai t . I t and f o o d
t ogethe r at tai n t o t he highe st . (Brh .
A di st inc t i on i s somet ime s made , and f re quently impli ed , b etween
p ra a a and the p réni c ; b etween the c hi e f: and t he subordiant e b reath s .
In thi s manner the r adhya. or c ent ral pr .a z i s spoken ofl. Death , in the f o rm
o f wearine s s , se is ed all the o ther sen se s o r p ranc e , but di d no t se i ze the
c ent ral one (Brh . The me aning i s that though the se n se s weary and
go t o re st,th e b reath ke ep s on going. In i t i s called the i c i n fc
“rana and overc ome s the asuras when the oth er s fai led . In Oh . It i s cal led
mulhya prana i s d i st inc t f rom the b rea th in th e no se , and ov erc ome s) the
258
Praqna 2 affi (:hs th e same in regard t o the c hi e f n r c n and it s subo rdinat e s .
At death the b reath s go to the moon, (Kane. o r t o the ai r . (Erh .
Previ ou s to thi s th e p r am c ontai ned in speech,e ye
,ear and mind -the o rde r
in which the f acult ie s fail at death —all uni t e i n the c ent ral o r ma in b reath,
ap parent ly equivalen t t o t he d ei t y . ( Kane. One paradoxical passage
t ell s u s that at death the b reath s do not leave , but swell up the b ody .
( Brh . In a general way , cr
a p : i s atached t o the body lik e a ho r se to
a c art . ( Ch . It i s the sap o f the l imb s,f o r when i t go e s away f rom
a limb , th e limb wi ther s) . (Brh. Al l the bo dy exc ept p ron: and ak ica
i s mat erial . (Brh .
During sleep , the sen se s ret i re int o a ( Ch . Kaus.
A p retty f igure t e ll s u s that during sleep,while th e soul i s o f f wande ring
in othe r sphere s,th e g raz e remain s behind
,guarding the wo rthl e s s ne st .
Th e func ti on o f b reathing and the maint enanc e o f li f e are k ept , though th e
real p er son i s not there . (Brb . I t i s unde r the c ont rol o f int elli
C O L G O . ( naus.-8 )
PrEna i s d ep endent on f ood ( c ans ) h enc e it i s c alled ant . ( Ch .
Of . al so Halt . It drie s u p wi thout f oo d . ( Brh . Al l t h e?
ar e “ ?
L n 3 are inc rea sed by f oo d, and they are even i d ent i f i ed wi th i t . ( T ai t .
(TM M ) M Gem—L 3 “
(“W W M Lw Jo s o le )Mait . 6 . 13)\Another pas sage stat e s t hat in the b eginning the
o riginal c o smic man t ri ed t o tak e p o sse s sion o f f o o d thorugh p r i nt but wa s
unab le t o do so ; had been able t o do so,simply b reathing on f o o d { abhi
f
rdr v
would hav e be en su ffic ent to su stain li f e . ( Ai t . When sprink led with
f ood the p ranc e dige st . (Mai t .
The loc al i ti e s o f c ran e have al ready b e en somewhat d i scu s se d under
the f ive b reath s . I t c ame f rom the no st ril s o f the primal man , and f rom it
came wind , whi le they re turned in inve rse o rd e r . ( Ait : Of . alsr
P . 8 . 13 . I t i s in the ey e ear and no se . ( Pra ; na . cf . 0h .
M W W W . M & A 7%J W
Franc , ac c o rding t o Oh . ,
i s int imat ely tonne c t ed wi th wat er , b eing
In Prfinag . 4 th e f iv e b rea th s are i dent i f i ed wi th pri e st s and feature s
of the sae t'
ti z e . In Brahma 2 all the breath s are said to b eta the heart .
They are i dent i f i ed wi t h Brahma . In Kanthaq . 1 the f ive breath s are ideni t i
f i e d wit h f ive sac ri f ic ial f i re s . The emb ryo po s se s se s p r which inc rea se s
wi th the eat ing and drink ing « f the mother . (Garbh 3 )
I n G . B .-3 8 it i s sa id that o ri " ’ i s sup po rt ed by f oo d , and
i n turn p ro duc e s and sup po rt s mani c . In Ksu ri , g r i q i i s drawn in th rough
the no se , and t ravel s in the ert eri e s . Thi s i s vi ewed as part o f Yoga p rac t ic e .
In Pranag . 1 o f f erings are made t o the f ive p rinr individually , as they we re
in Mahfin . The palp itat ion o f the b reathing b o dy — i s re f erre d
t o several t i me s with rel i giou s signi f icat io n in Mukt i . a s in Breath
t s elf i s c on si d ere d t o wo r shi p in Han sa 1, as th e in and ou t b reathing ass
sup po sed to ut te r c ont inually th e mant ra Q Ha m- sc , Keuri 14
want s the b reath re st rained in Yoga -an i dea which b ec ome s very dami liar .
As f o r t he ot he r b reath s than b ra gs ,not muc h i s said in addi t i on to
what has be en given,though s pans i s ment ioned a f ew t ime s . Th ey are t o b e
re st rained togethe r ( i e . trans and c ; an :} in Y oga . ( San . 4 ) A rather di ffi
cult pa s sage ia huk t i say s that when has set t le d down an d pro ne ha s not
ari sen i n the he art ( abhy u c i t a ) then the s ur b has a stat e,wh en th e bo dy i s
f i lle d wi th ai r , i s exp eri enc e d b y th e Yogin . That i s,when 3 En ha s set tl e d
down in t o the lower part o f th e bo dy and the p rone ha s no t b e en exp elled
f rom the lungs . But wh en prune ha s set t led out si d e -t hat i s , b een b reathed out ,
and a ha s no t yet c ome up, ( a then yogi n s L now th e out e r kur bh:
( Mui t i . Th e pa sseie may b e di f f e rent ly int erpret ed , b ut thi s seem s
t o b e th e me aning , though i t may re f e r t o one fullbrdathing in the upp er and
arother in the lower part o f t h e b o dy -which perhap s i s b et t er .
of the b ody an d the lik e i s the wo rk o f g ur zn Vomi t ing and the lik e ar e
th e wo rk s of“ Tz q c . l inking and the like are the work s o f Lflrmr . hunger i s
the work o f 1 y r“ . Fat igue i s the wo rk of l -vaa'
u and the l ike
are the *work s o f dhacann '~c . Thu s knowing di st inc tly th e plac e s o f the art
e ri e s and o f t he ai r s and th eir wo rk s,let one p e r f o rm the c lean sing o f
the art eri e s .
Pe rhap s it wi ll b e well t o see what el se i s sai d,b y way of c onf i rma
t ion or otherwi se in regard t o the s e f iv e new ai r s b e fo re p roc e eding t o a
d i scu ssion o f grins in general . Q ri j . agree s that n an d i t s f our
c ompanion ai r s g rizzxizx x th e shin ,b one s
,and the li ke . Vomi t ing i s regularly
given as t i n-the func t i on o f Cu . 2 5 ; T ri ; . 85 ; gri j . In the
last pa s sage 7y an? i s wri t ten,but evi dent ly nEga i s what i s meant . Kfirn
wink s . ( Yo . Cu . 25; T ric. 85; gri j . Conc ent rat ion o f th i s ai r in it s
v ein give s the st ead ine s s which a yogi n de si re s . ( 9531. The func t ion
o f krks r‘ i s alway s the p roduc t io n o f hunger , though some c orrupt ion exi st s
in T rig . 8 6 . ( Yo . Cu . 25; Gri j . The last two ain:s are somewhat mixe d
up . The normal funct ion of dec e de fi~ i s the cau sing of sle ep and fat igue , as
already gi ven . ( T rio. 8 6 ; Qri j . I t i s onc e,as da t t a . said to b e a
vi tal ai r whi ch wast e s away the b o dy . ( Yo . Cu . 2 5 ) Ordi nari ly , dha nan;
i s c onnect ed wi th th e wast ing of th e bo dy,and c oup led somet ime s wi th b eaut y .
whi ch it carr ie s away . ( T ri c. 86 ; Qri j . I ndee d it i s sai d
never t o f o r sak e even the dead body . ( Yo . Ou . 26 ) Q ui t e a chap t er on th e
b reaths b egi ns wi th Tris. 75 .
As t o the other ai r s , c ameos c i rculat e s in all the ve in s . , as no t ed
ab ove . ( g5nd. I t i s there stat e d t o be the ai r which nouri she s th e
body . In Varah . i t i s al so the air whic h ac t ae on -d ige st s - f oo d . Yo . Cu .
24 te ll s u s that i t i s sp ec iali z ed in the navel regi on . Again i t i s sai d t o
pe rmeat e spegah. ( Trig . b eg . ) The same sec t ion c onnec t s it wi th v
.
'
M M W M‘
M w w—M \T w 11
Diana i s locat ed in the mi ddle o f the throat . ( Yo . Cu . 24) Otherwi se
O f i n Anna . They are sai d to t ouch the art eri e s pro
du cing thought . Henc e the re st raint o f breath , in o rd er that thought may be
he ld in ch eck . Oneway o f d o ing thi s i s t o put th e put the t ongue agains t. the
uv6:1a and pre s s . There are al so other way s . it may b e b rought abs out in
which would here seem to b e some sort o f t ranc e or hypno tic stat e .
and uuk ti(gang. - 30) Narad al so mak e s i dea s sub j ec t t o the pul sat ion
o f breath , and b reath in turn to b e sub j ec t t o thoua n j . make s the
wo rk o f in and out b reathing .
Prizg c i rculat e s in the mouth ,no se , navel,and heart . ( QrI j .
ed ia -as can fhn u uv . c,‘C~\ a. 3 )
I t reac he s the anu s , t ie to p o f the he ad , and th e l unia_ j . ( gri j .-47)
I t i s in the c av iti e s o f the he art . ( Sub . 4 )I t go e s to the end o f th e palat e . ( 98nd. I t i s in the cavit y o f
th e no se , and in th e art e ri e s . ( Tri g . 116 , 138) b e ing sup po rt ed by the latt e r
(VarEh . Some o f th e se f anc i f ul things may b e ac c ount ed f o r by the
sy st em. of vein s which the yogin imagined t o penet rat e hi s b ody , and by mean s
o f whic h h e thought he c ould c onvey the se b reath s t o any plac e h e de si re d .
I n it s pul sat i on s, t rans go e s ou t wi th the syllabl e and c ome s in
wi th so :"
r c ont inually repeat s the mant ra kamc a , t ime s in 24
hour s . Thi s i s undoubt dedly quot ed f rom Han sa .
Pr?f : i s said t o ext end out 12 f inger s . ( Anna . Send . Thi s may
ap p ly t o the d i stan c e to which a normal b reath may b e f elt . Or it may
mean that one i s surrounded by an invi sible env elo p e o f z p ert aining t o
him,whio i alw y a at u st thi s di stanc e f rom thb b ody .
fi ~aQ A A
TM L Q
VA A
M I.) ZV M AL J k t (“
WM -fie»W6
Th e f ive are me nt ioned apart f rom t he t en i n Varfih . In 213!
T ri c . b eg . the f ive are each c onnec t ed wi th some ment al fac ul t y . with rr c r “
VF
i t sel f,in thi s pa s sage
,ai lfz u i s unit ed; i t s quality i s smell , since
kope r
at e s through the no se,whi sk- dwe ll s in th e anu s ans h e earth. Th ese la st
are stereo typ ed c o rrelat ion s . As t r zr' bec ome s weak er mental power weak en s .
Thi s may b e no ted in death . ( saehb Sare e . Th e f ive r are c o rr elated
wi th the su nd iv ini ty , ( Bfirya 4) and p r it sel f wi th gr . ( T ri g . b eg . )
M a m -m e
ss i a m f fi d
’
m i M r " " 77q (“as
2111
- 4;
Tai t . Katha . 9v et .
uai t . Pracna-12 ;
Ka1v . Bis
caud. Nrsp . Nrsu t . Culika 12 ; Qi ra s .
Brahma 2 ; Ci khfi 2 ; MahE 1; hfida . JKbEla Ire. Maha'
n .
Tadeva Paifig . Pranav . 1; Ramap . 80;
Ramot . 5; Amrt a . 26 ; Tric. b eg . Yo .
Ou . Yo . Ku . 96nd.
Bhihsu ; Paramap . Turi ya; n j . Go p§ lo t . VarEh . 5 . ll , l&
Sant h . 2 ; Bu t t . l ; Sara s . ; flare d . §T
86 ; Varadot . Anna .
-9 1; -52 ; Sub . Mant ri . 12 ; Niri hi re d . Pficu .1,8
Rfimarah . ganq . 1; Ekfils. 3 ; Parab . b eg . ; Devi , end ; T ri p . u . Si tEk ‘Qq q q t
For a t cnc and o ther breath s be side s " u
rn; the f ollowing may be not ed .
Brh . Tait . hand. Pracna Pranag .
copsier. 7b; 5b ; Anna .
268
From the me taphy sic al si d e there is much sai d about li f e an death in
th e Upani sad s , but not a great deal f rom the phy sical standpoint . A di s
c u s si en o f the nature of o r individual li f e would be out o f plac e
he re . Howev er it may be ment i oned that l i f e c on si st s in a soul at tai ning t o
a bo dy th rough goo d and evil wo rk s . ( Sarv . Li f e i s li ke the spac e which
i s enc lo sed in j ar; it i s not brok en when the body i s b roken,j ust a s spac e
i s not b rok en when the j ar i s b rok en . I
éowande rs i n the whe el
o f the navel , and i s b ound by meri t and s in . ( 9524?
It i s bound by the
sen se s and the f ee ling o f sel f . (Yo . Cu . 84 ) I t remai ns in the bo dy as long
a s ai r doe s . (Yo . 1u . 9 0 ) Se e al so Yo . cu . 27) The same Upani sad speak s o f it
a s wande ring in the heart . (14 ) NErad 6 . say s that through pri de o f i t s hou se ,
th e bo dy , it wander s th rough the t o dy as a householder through hi s hou se ,
and in di f f e rent quart e rs of the bo dy expe rienc e s di f f erent menat l stat e s
Because of b eing dep endent on bo dy,the rt are many i fr a s .
Ac c ording to Ch . hunger i s cau sed by wat er , whi ch carri e s away
the foo d in the body . Wat e r i s in t urn c arri ed away by the heat o f the bo dy ,
thu s pro duc ing thir st . Ac c o rding to Mai t . hunger i s cau se d by the q ual
i ty o f t al u s . a s i s thi r st al so . Hunger i s cau sed by t he vi tal ai r
L
( 95nd. I t i s c onnec t ed wi th th e element f i re . (s5rIr . ) So do e s th ir st .
AM M /J L U‘A
Thi r st , t
ffiii
:Am be cured by Yoga b reathings , e spec ially by the
(75nd. 1. 4
0 J
o . Ku . Yo . cu . 52 ) Cum63W W
Di seas s , r:_ are not much nwnt i oned in t e early Up ani sad s . Bu t thyy
do ap pear in the lat e Yoga di sc u s s ion s . Many d i sea se s are c au se d by imp rop er
b reathings , and p re p e r manipulat ion 70 f the breath,
c c
ir
gi
zgt o Yoga rule s ,
wi ll cure them . ( Yo . Cu . 117, ff . ; Yo . Cu . 52 ; 6 .23144Yo . Ku . 1-17)
conc entrat i ng the b reath in the af f ec t e d membe xfi s bene f ic ial . ( T rig . 112 )
They may al so be cured by po sture s,
a ant"
. ( qfind. They are c au se d by
sl e e p in the day t ime , too nm ch sexual int erc our se , ob st ruc t ion o f the bowel s
and. u re thra ,lab o red b reathing
,uneven si t t ing and th e l ike . (70 . ha .
As to sp e c i f ic di sea se s,no t rany are ment ioned . Perhap s the f i r st
270
blind , ( hi re d . (NRrad . and
f o o li sh , (Narad . mugh ‘
r . f ool (Ndra d .
humpbac k ed , ( harad . lame , (Narad . 4 , end) g' n
'
u. lame , (NErad .
an d eunuch , (flare d . A f ew ext ra touche s are
scmet ime s given . The f o r inst anc e s, looke s on a lfly ear old gi rl
as a new bo rn babe . (hi re d . The asc et ic who move s around only t o answer
the c all s o f nature i s c alled .
" Fg
u. (hi re d . i s one who se sight
doe s not g o far . (Nfirad . In Ch . it i s sai d t hat the shadow in the
wat er , t here fleo t i on, i s blind i f the b o dy i s . Six firm o r inf irmi t ie s o f
th e body are ment i oned in Hu dg . 6 and Varah . 9 ; hunger, thirst , so rrow ,
in fat uat ion , o ld ag e , death . In c onnec t ion with th e asc et ic , i t may be added
that he i s t o vi ew h i s bo dy a s a c o rp se,hunc c c . o r ga
‘ " (hi re d . 5 . beg;
7. beg . )
_ uru . o r death ,
i s somethi ng who se ap p roa c h i s sai d t o b e hard t o
st o p . I t i s thu s lik e the t id e o f the sea . There i s the p ic ture
of f ri end s st anding around th e bed o f a dy ing man , near thre e millenniums
ago , as they do t o day , and anxiou s for the last wo rd s and the last si gns o f
c onsc iou s int e lli genc e on the part o f the on e about to die , asking him even
a s suc h a one i shsked t oday ," Do you know me ; do y ou know m e7'
“75 2
The lat t er pa ssage inf o rms u s that at the
t ime o f deat h , speech merge s int o mind,mind int o breath , and breath into
heat , wh ile heat me rge s int o the highe st being . Th i s would seem t o re f e r t o
the o rde r in which the sen se s and f unc t ion s o f the bo dy leave in death , as
we ll as t o th ei r ult imat e ab sorp t ionknto the Supremel t ne ing . In Kaus.
i t seem s to be impli ed that the o rd er in which the sen se s f ai l i s sp e ech ,
si ght , h earing , thought ,breath . The se facult i e s , c onc ent rat ing in sashxsx
one another in the o rde r g iv en , are f inally uni t ed in th e chi e f »r which
t hen leave s the b ody . Thi s i s al so t aught in Kau s. Brh . 4 . 4l ,2 al so
In the lat e r Upanisad s , d eath i s c ount ed one o f th e six in f irmi t i e s ,
and may be remove d by c e rtain f o rm s o f Yoga . ( Mudg . 3 ; Yo . cu . 52 ) When the
de si re t o d ie c ome s , c e rtai n man t ras, and exerc i se s shoul d b e employ ed ,
that one may ob t ai n relea se . ( T ri p . M . That o f h igh er c la s se s o f a sc e t
ic s should tak e plac e on some anthi ll,o r in a cave
,o r some such plac e .
(TEj . Narad . 4 . end ) tnx intax ssXXlg
In Trio. 120 f f . an int ere st ing li st o f omen s o f approac hing death i s
given . I f one has throbb ing o r pal pi tat i on i n hi s thumb s o r great to e s , h e wil l
di e in a -y ear . I f i n hi s wrist s o r ank le s , in six month s . I n hi s elbow s ,
th re e month s . I f the t rembling i s in hi s belly , genit al s , o r si de s , he will
live a month . I f i t i s in the zc rc'
" c r
a . which may mean e i the r the anu s
o r th e nav el , death wi ll tak e plac e in t en day s . A f lic k ering light , lik e a
f i re f ly,f o ret ell s d eath in f ive day s When one c an not behold the ti p o f t he
t ongue , li f e will c ont inue thre e day s . The sight of f lame indic ates death
in two day s . Anothe r int e re sting mat t er i s t he beli e f , current t o thi s day ,
that one ' s thoughts at t he t ime o f death det ermine h i s future . In hi de . a
li s t o f twe lve stat ion s,ranging f rom the sup re me rul e in Ind ia t o abod e s
with the de it i e s i n variou s loko s , i s rec o rded as the f ruit s o f think ing o f
in c e rt ai n way s at t he t ime o f di s so lut i on .
As a so rt o f app end ix it may be well t o include a bri e f chapt e r on
th e c o smical and f igura t ive co rrelat ion s o f the bo dy wh ic h are to be f ound
in the Upanisad s . The se have al ready b e en noted while dealing wi th the
d i f f erent part s o f the bo dy:but a bri e f gene ral summa ry wi ll be given here .
No t every f igurat iv e stat eme nt wi ll be inc luded here, as some of them are
o f ve ry mino r imp ort an ce . however , all the chie f pas sage s will bfigiven.
The se c o rrelat ion s f all int o sevefii group s; th e c o smical nan i dea , the
c o smical b i rd , a pas sage on the a cvame dha , t he sac ri f ic e , and the c hariot .
The i dea o f th e c o smical man or p u ro sa i s the f i rst and mo st odnspi c
uou s o f the se . I n some o f the se pa s sage s the unive rse i s c onc eived o f as
one vast man , to who se member s the prominent part s o f the univ er se c orre spond .
In o the r pa s sage s t he se memb er s serve as the p lac e of o rigin f o r variou s
el ement s o f the v i s ib le wo rld . To thi s lat t e x~ c1as s belong s the li st in th e
Pu ru sa sfiltfi . hany of t he se c orselat ions are st andard one s , and o f t e n re
p os t e d . The li st i s as f ollows . From hi s mind came th e mo on , f rom hi s ey e s
the sun , f rom hi s mouth,Indra and Agn i
,f rom h i s b reath , Yfiyu or wind ; frmm
hi t navel mi dai r; f rom hi s head , th e sky ; f rom hi s siift
th e earth ; f rom hi s
ear s the loka s . P . 8 . In P . S . 22,f rom hi s si de s c ome day and nigh t ,
f rom hi s bo dy the st ar s,and f rom hi s flaw s the Acvins . Thi s same hymn al so
inc lude s th e f our ca st e s , Brahman , Keat riya , Vaigya and gudra , f rom the
mouth arms , th ighs , and f eet,re sp ec tively
, of the c o smic al nan . hany o f
the se c o rrelat i ons are sel f sugge st ive,when onc e the idea o f a c o smic al man
i s grant ed . such for instanc efjghe c onnec t ion o f ey e and sun , o f wind and
b reath . Oth er s have a d irec t ional relat i on, as th e sky and the head , the earth
and the f ee t,while the navel and rd dair would th en come in naturally .
The c c v nm c iha pas sage with which Bgh . o pen s i s along much the same
l ine s,but wi ll be di scu s se d a lit t le lat er . In Brh . i s a passage in
which the re are some c o rrelat ion s,but mainly with the d irec t ion s . Aft er
The Be ing has div ide d him sel f int o th re e part s , ( Fire ) , sun , and wind , hi s
hi s sp eech i s th e Vedas , hi s b reath the w ind,hi s heart the un iver se
,hi s
f e et pro iu i e the earth . A no ther sho rt pns ege i s Me lt . 6 .f, where the bo dy o f
Praj dpat i c ons i st s o f the thre e worl le ,r"
. be ig g the head,h ti e navel ,
bh fi} th e f ee t , and the sun the ey e .
In the lat er Uynni sads ,no t so mu~h p ror inen ze i s given to thi s ty pe
of c o rre lat ion s , though it i s p rominent in two Upani sad s . Varado t . 3 f o llow s
in the mai n th e beat en t rac k . The sky,d~ i s p ervaded by in f init e head s o f
the deit y , the quart er s , i fl ca by infint i e han d s,the v "
on 3 : o r int eratmo~
spheric realm , by in f ini t e b elli e s,an d the earth by in f int e f e et . Then we
are to ld that f rom the head o f the dei ty c ame th e sky,f ron hi s eye the
sun ,from h i s mind the moon ,
f rom hi s nav el the mi da tmo sphe re , f rom hi s mouth
f i re , f rom hi s f eet the earth , and f rom h i s ear the direc tion s . Again , hi s
nave l p roduc ed o r Brahma, hi s mouth a o r Vi snu , and hi s eye
t ar :s , o r Rudra . Hi s body became the Br ahr
zn i’
or c o smic egg . Some of the se
last c orrelat i one ,asc '
a s f rom the ey e,seem rat he r ou t o f plac e .
As mi ght b e expec t ed,Sub . have thing s s somewhat mixed . From
c ome s th e mo on,f rom the ey e the sun
,f rom the ears wind and b reath ,
f rom the heart the univ erse . The f ou r c ast e s are derived in the u sual way .
t he mountai n s,f rom th e hai rs o f t i e bo dy plant s
,and f rom the fo rehead
Rudra .
Th e c o rrelat ion o f sp eech wi th f i re i s c urious , y et p er si st ent . I t may
b e due t o the fac t that b reath expi red i s war:,so that the b reath o f th e
c o smi cal ru rfisa may be warm enou gh t o be fi re Th e c onne zt ien o f death ,
ar e na and the naveqi s mo re d i f f i c u lt . hu t adge se s are pas sed f rom th e
bowel s af t er death , it i s easy t o c onc eiv e that ap . . in the bowel s , i s
mo re p er si st ent than aren a . in th e lungs . The nav el mu s t have a fun:t lon ,
and that of admi t t ing o r expelling thi s a ir seems to be the mo s t natural
one to a s sign to i t,th oug h thidsame air may pa s s tlrough the anu s . In thi s
Th ere are two pas sage s ab out thi s c o smic al bi rd which may be c i tdd .
The sho rt er one i s f rom Han sa 6 . The wing s o f the bi rd are Agni and some ,
th e head i s the eye and the mouth the ‘tn _n
,o r na sal sound ; the
f ee t are Bears and BadrEni , th e arm s are t ime and f i re . It w ill
b e no t e d that the he rd i s a que e r one,hav ing bo th wing s and arm s . The
o th er one , Nada , l-4 , i s in some way s more fanta st ic . The right and le f t
wingv are th e H v re spec t iv ely
,o f the word on . the tail i s the n
, the
hal f more addi t i onal o f o n i s the z a ct
al: or t op of the head; the f ee t
are the or qualit i e s ; the body i s the right and le f t ey e s
are " a: and afiharna on it s f e et i t suppo rt s bhi rlc xa: on it s knee s
bh a , 1o in th e regi on of th e thighs"
t r i cks . in th e navel regi on ,
“ alc r t ckax , in the heart so in the nec k on the f o rehead
at the j unc ture o f the ey eb row s,
tak e .
The i dea o f th e c o smi cal c hariot go e s bach t o Katha . The
se l f or soul i s t he pas senger who ri de s wi thin the chariot , or bo dy ; th e
int ellslec t , buddh i . i s th e c hari ot eer for h im ; th e mind , man : i s th e ‘e
reins . The sen se s are the ho r se s, and thr ob j ec téof sen se th e ro ad s . W hen
one i s wi thou t under standi ng , so that hi s min d , th e rein s , i s not f irmly
h eld , h i s sen se s are unmanageable , like th e vic i ou s hos se s o f a char io t ee r .
He i s unable t o reac h thefle si re d end o f h i s j ourney , but merely ent ers into
the roun d of bi rth s . He who has under standing and hold s hi s mind f i rm ,
has h i s sen se s und er c ont rol lik e th e good hor se s o f a chari ot eer . he
reac he s the end o f hi s j ourney,th e highe st abo de o f Visnu , and i s not
sub j ec t t o th e round o f bi rth s .
Thi s bec ome s a f avo ri t e f i gure . In wait . i t i s rep eat ed , t ith
some vari ati on . Th e knowledge sen se s are the rein s - f ive o f them , the
ac t iv e o rgans are the hor se s,the body th e chari ot , the m ind the chari o t ee r ,
a nd the whi p the ta spe ranent . Driv en by th i s whi p , the bo dy go e s around
280
In Garbha 5 the sac rili cial idea take s snothedturn. Th ree f i re s li e
in -th e body ; the knowledg e f i re ,the see ing f i re
,and t h e dige st ive f i re .
dige st ive f i re c ooks or dig est s
whatever i s eat en drunk , lick ed , or suck ed . The knowledge f ire obtains godd
and evil wo rk s . The seeing f i re ob serve s f o rms . They are in the mouth a s
the in the b elly a s the and in the heart as the
ds i s_ f i re s . The i s the sac ri f ic e r ,the mind the o f f ic iat ing Brahman
p rie st , c ovetou sne s s and the like are the animal s o f f ered , re solut ion and
sat i sf ac t i on the i ii the knowledge sen se s th e sac ri f ici al
ve s se l s , the ac t ion sense s the v i i s . the head the sac ri f ic ial cup , (laj ab
the hai r Of t he head the 1ar*‘
s gras s , and the mouth th e o r
spac e within the sac ri f ic ial area . All th e se i dea s are c onnec te d wi th the
f igu re so o f t en pre sent ed,which indee d seem s at t ime s t o have b een looked
on a s muc h mo re than a mere f igure o f spe ec h , that eat ing and drink ing , the
func t i onse f the bo dy , c onst i t ut e a f o rm of wo r shi p .
ha shmuch more elaborat e sac i fi c e in mind . He re the at : 3:
i s the sac ri f ic e r , and int elligenc e hi s wi f e . Th e Ve das are the chi e f p rism
ser ene i s T zrf"
ar t rt
a adap t the 7 " se l f -c onsc iou sne ss fil the
"
r"
r . the the bo dy th e alta ry the no se th e no rthern alter ,
th e t o p o f the head th e soma ve ssel s,the ri ght hand the sr :
' spoon , th e
le f t hand the ghee p lat t er,the ear s the sprinkle r , the eye s $ JYC DH T Q C L 1
i t s : are the a s ’
O f . the r e“ bET c i ;DI
th e nec k the t ri p c t ar . the t an:
are the sh e s . the bhfit as are th e the t ongue i s the t eeth
an d lip s are the rantfl
k th e palat e i s S Cfl‘ C“V C T i CE memo ry ,
me rcy,f o rbearanc e , and harml e ssne s s are the f atn
r'
.
“
x c i s the
sac ri f ic ial stak e,ho pe the rein s
,t ax
“: i s the chari ot , de sire s are the
boa st s , the hai r i s sac ri f ic ial gra s s , th e knowledge sen se s are the sac ri
fi c ial ve s se l s , the work sense s are the o f f e ring s , a ’ T' “i s th e i e
.
and t y i a the dol sm a . fleet of which sound s like non sen se . How eve r , the c on
10 . Plr harfiFflkn . Al so . Varl h. 35nd. There are variation s
in the spelling o f thi s word . sometime s i t i s even ci l l
'
. T rig . advi se s
eqe e s ing the end o f th e peni s b etwe en the c ro s se d ankle s,wit h the hand s on
th e knee s . add s , omi t t ing th e qq ee z ing , t o spm d out the f inger s and
lo ok toward s the t i p o f the no se .
11 . s ec . Al so Qri j . Qind . VarE h. Poe t below sc rotum
b e si de p eni s , wi th si de s o f the f ee t in the hand s .
12 . Huk t Al so . Qand . Varah . Qri j . Blight
variat i on s are f ound in thi s , gri j . geving two f o rms o f i t . But all are
prac t ically th e same ; p re s sing bhe peni s with the cro s se d ankle s , or with
one ankle which i s in turn p res sed by th e oth e r one .
13 . Ke v i ra .
s Algbt gang. Qri j . Varfih . slight
vari ation s are to b e f ound i n thi s , but in general i t i s si t t ing on th e
ground with erec t and rigi d b ody and nec k,with th e e lbow s at each side of the
navel , f orearms ext ended , and hand s spreae. out lik e the tai l o f a peaf owl .
Some time s th e f ee t are rai sed li ke a st ic k .
14 .
‘
sv e pi tha . Si t t ing with ri ght f o ot on base of le f t th igh , hand s
on knee s , grasping th e leftthumb i n the le f t hand .
15 . si d cha . Al so . 95nd. Sq e e zing th e y c ri apparent ly the ext reme
lower part o f the ab domen .,wi th the le f t f o ot , and the ri ght one over the
peni s .
16 . Pa c imfh aéna . Sp read ing the ( sol e s o f th e f eet on the ground ,
wi th the thu mb ( or too ) gra sp ed b y th e f o rearms,and th e f o rehead on the knee s .
17 n fha . That po sture in which ease o r enduranc e may in no wi se b e
obt ai ne d .
A . f ew oth er a ear " are ment ioned in othe r plac e s . Such are the
18 . c al Varfi h. Thi s i s wi th o p po si t e b od i e s on thigh s , and
rigi d b ody and re strained breathing s .
Vita .
Ge o rge William Brown was bo rn near Balt imore , Md . , Oc t . 25th , 1870 , and
rec eived hi s e lementary and part o f hi s sec ondary educ ati on in the c ommon
sc hool s o f th e stat e . Af te r c omplet ing hi s sec ondary wo rk in hi ram College ,
Hi ram , Ohio , he al so f ini shed th e c oll egiat e c our se th ere , rec ei ving the
degree o f Bac helo r o f Art s in 1897. In th e f ollowing year he was grant e d
the degree o f Mast er o f Art s f o r advanc ed work , chie f ly in Heb rew and Semi t
i c s . Upon leaving c o llege,he fi r st t aught in C ent ral Chri st ian C ollege ,
Albany , Mo . , and then served as Sppe rint endent o f Public School s , Pri nc et on
No . I n 19 00 he went t o India as a mi s sionary under the au spic e s o f the
Fo rei gn Chri stian Mi s sionary Soc i et y , o f C inc innat i , Ohio , and remai ned in
Ind ia seven and a hal f y ear s . Thi s time was equally d ivi ded between Harda
and Jubbul pore , C ent ral Provinc e s,and was devot ed t o general educati onal
work , and
t
zhe in sti tut i on and management o f Chri st ian Bible Co llege ,
Jubbulpo re , India , the theologic al in st ituti on of the Ch ri st ian Mi s sion in
India . he returned t o Americ a in 19 08 , and ent ered John s Hopk in s Uni ver sit y
in Oc t ob er o f that year , hi s stud i e s being San sk ri t , Hebrew ,and Arab ic .